Home

The user manual describes all items concerning the

1. 4027 4028 4029 4030 current selected additional coordinate system Note 1 P code stands for the current selected additional coordinate system Note 2 When G 4002 code is being executed the value obtained in 4002 is 17 18 or 19 Note 3 The modal message can be read but cannot be written 2 Current position message 135 CGSR I Hist Relative Read GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Variable oo Tool offset Position message coordinate operation No i value system as moving 5001 Block end position of X axis ABSIO 5002 Block end position of Y axis Tool nose ABSIO position not T Workpiece 5003 Block end position of Z axis involved coordinate Allowed ABSIO ested program 5004 Block end position of 4th axis y specified ABSIO position 5005 Block end position of 5th axis ABSIO 5006 Block end position of X axis ABSMT 5007 Block end position of Y axis Tool basi ABSMT P ae achine 5008 Block end position of Z axis pee coordinate involved ABSMT a f system Machine 5009 Block end position of 4th axis coordinate ABSMT 5010 Block end position of 5th axis ABSMT a Unallowed 5011 Block end position of X axis ABSOT 5012 Block end position of Y axis ABSOT 5013 Block end position of Z axis ABSOT 5014 Block end
2. MOA 1 Outputting all when program restarts 0 Outputting the last M S T B codes when program restarts MOU 1 To output M S T B codes when program restarts 0 Not output M S T B codes when program restarts Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 059 OTOP OTOP LoPT Aov DEC OHPG OHPG 1 Feed by external handwheel 0 Feed not by external handwheel DEC 1 Use external deceleration 0 Not use external deceleration AOV 1 Use automatic corner override 0 Not use automatic corner override LOPT 1 Use external operator panel lock 0 Not use external operator panel lock OTOP 1 Use external editing lock 0 Not use external editing lock OTOP 1 Use external start and stop 0 Not use external start and stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 6 0 sc spk xc TLF 274 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual TLF 1 Use tool life management 0 Not use tool life management IXC 1 Use indexing table 0 Not use indexing table SPK 1 Use small peck drilling cycle 0 Not use small peck drilling cycle SCL 1 Use scaling 0 Not use scaling Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 0 6 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM SYC ssc SSC 1 To use constant surface speed control 0 Not use constant su
3. CANT CANT 1 Automatic clearing for single piece 0 Not automatic clearing for single piece Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number o 5 6 HNGD HCL IHD HPF HPF 1 To select full running for MPG moving 0 Not select full running for MPG moving IHD 1 MPG moving is output unit 0 MPG moving is input unit HCL 1 Clearing MPG interruption display by soft keys enabled 0 Clearing MPG interruption display by soft keys disabled HNGD 1 Axes moving direction are identical with MPG rotation direction 0 Axes moving direction are not identical with MPG rotation direction Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 5 7 MMDI OP7 OP6 OP1 OP1 1 Mode selection by soft keys enabled 0 Mode selection by soft keys disabled OP6 1 Block skip single block machine lock and dry run operation by soft keys 273 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual enabled 0 Block skip single block machine lock and dry run operation by soft keys disabled OP7 1 Cycle start and dwell operation by soft keys enabled 0 Cycle start and dwell operation by soft keys disabled MMDI 1 Panel keyboard can be replaced by soft keyboard 0 Panel keyboard can not be replaced by soft keyboard Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 58 MOU MOA
4. ccccccceecceccceeeceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeseecnneeeeeeeeeetenneas 172 2 6 Storage stroke detection cccccccceeceeeeeecececeeeeceeceneaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeesteteeneneeeeeeeetes 172 3 Interface Display as well as Data Modification and Settind 11 2ccccccccsssseeneneceeeseeeesees 176 3 1 Position GIS play sosisini oea a esa ere ieee ee sees 176 3 1 1 Four types of position display ccccecceeccceceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeesseeenseaeeees 176 3 1 2 The display of the run time part count programming speed and override actual SPOS Ro OnE E es Getascciesda assay ada S andes ee abe el 178 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and Mediating c cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 180 32 Program CIS Play s sesscieisesteiectvaseeieas eaea esaea ea eE a EE a EEA a NEES 181 3 3 The display modification and setting of the parameters c cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 185 3 9 1 Parameter display seversecssitsscnesstesseestanteteasarsecostenstutvanesceestansettedar ser aeti an 185 3 3 2 Modification and setting of the parameter values c ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 186 3 4 Offset display modification and Setting ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseneeees 187 3 4 1 Offset IS PIA 5 ececseses sag cned pesweteeeetui te eatenedadedd needieeediesshas el Uadeeadetehal haceteeediana yest 187 3 4 2 Modification and setting of the offset ValUC ccc
5. Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 1 A single axis moving specified by incremental values of next block 51 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The block after G31 is a single axis moving specified by absolute values as Fig 4 2 16 2 shows G31 G90X200 00 F100 Y100 0 iee Skip signal is input here gt X200 0 Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 2 Single axis moving specified by absolute values of next block The block after G31 is 2 axis moving specified by absolute values as Fig 4 2 16 3 shows G31 G90X200 0 F100 X300 0 Y 100 0 Y Skip signal is input here 100 300 100 Actual motion Motion without skip signal 100 200 300 Fig 4 2 16 3 2 axis moving specified by absolute values of next block 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 Format G20 input by inch system G21 input by metric system Function They are used for the inch metric input conversion in program Explanation 1 This function must be specified by a single block at the beginning of the program before the coordinate system setup 2 Change the unit of the following item after the inch metric conversion Feedrate specified by F code Position instruction Workpiece zero offset value Tool compensation value 52 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note Note Note Note Note Note Scale unit of MPG Moving distance in
6. Start position Start position Non linear interpolation positioning N Linear interpolation positioning End position End position Fig 4 2 1 1 Explanation 1 After GOO is executed the system change the tool current move mode for GOO mode The GOO parameter value is 0 or G01 parameter value is 1 default mode can be set by bit parameter No 031 0 while the power is switched on 2 The tool doesn t move if positioning parameter is not specified and the system only change the current tool move mode for GOO 3 G00 are identical with GO 4 G0 speed for X Y Z axis is set by number parameter P88 P92 Restrictions 1 The traverse speed is set by parameter if F is specified in GO instruction it is used for the following cutting feedrate For example GO X0 Y10 F800 rapid traversing by system parameter set G1 X20 Y50 by F800 feedrate The rapid feedrate is adjusted by the key on operator panel with following override FO 25 50 100 see Fig 2 4 1 2 The speed for FO is set by number parameter P93 and 24 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual they are used by all axes Fig 2 4 1 2 Rapid feedrate override key 2 G00 is unallowed to be programmed in a block with the same group modal G codes such as G01 G02 G03 otherwise alarm is issued by system 4 2 2 Linear interpolation G01 Format G01 X_Y_Z_F_ Function The tool moves along a line to the specified position at the feedrate
7. Psw page of the SETTING Cc Move the cursor to the items to be altered in the parameter or program 191 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual d Set the parameter or program switch by pressing Left or Right cursor key When the parameter switch is set for OFF the system parameter modification and setting are unallowed when the program switch is set for OFF the program editting is unallowed too 3 5 3 Coordinate setting interface 1 Press G54 G59 soft key to enter coordinate setting interface which is shown as following Fig 3 5 3 1 SETTING G54 Gd9 CURRENT WORKPIECE G54 000002 N0120 MACHINE G54 G55 X 0 00000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 00000 y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 00000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 EXT G56 G57 X 0 00000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 00000 Yy 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 00000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 DATA 0000 T0100 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 3 1 Besides 6 from G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system standard 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can also be used in this system as are shown in Fig 3 5 3 2 And each coordinate system can be viewed or modified by page keys See details for these additional workpiece coordinate systems in PROGRAMMING Section 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system SETTING G54 G59 000002 N0120 CURRENT WORKPIECE G54 MACHINE G58 G59 X 0 00000 X 0 0000
8. 0164 The instruction can t be executed in scaling mode 0165 Please specify the instruction in a single block 0166 No axis specified in reference point return 0153 T code not found 0163 The instruction can t be executed in revolution mode 0167 intermediate point coordinate too large 0168 the min dwell time at the hole botton should be shorter than the max dwell time 0170 tool radius compensation not cancelled 308 CGiSR I HIS GSK218MCNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0172 Protinegeroriess tnan in blokeating subprogram 0173 Subprogram called beyond 9999 times 0190 V too small or undefined 0191 W too small or undefined 0205 rigid mode DI signal off 0192 Q too small or undefined 0206 can t change plane rigid tapping 0204 illegal axis operation 309 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual or eean O address repetition error os famers YC CECL Ti or emenyn TS o0 frasen O 001 arcae nascon o 002 acaminar Ti 003 arcae nasdem oo ooa acam 00s arcam nasou 006 arc aam nans vate voee oo 0207 APC alarm nans batery voege Ooo 008 APCalarn nansbater votage tow 009 arcaei nans zRN meos 050 SeCalarninanispuseencoder o 0851 SPC alarm maris commune 0400 seoa neso O aor senoatemnaievROve wos enoaan Ti Osos soaa oori Ti 007 servoalarm supereteeaning o C Ti 0410 servo alarm naris superheteroana OO oan sero alarn mans su
9. 0200 Setting range 0 400 ms 0201 Setting range 0 9999 ms 0202 Compensation step of X axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Compensation step of Y axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Compensation step of Z axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Compensation step of 4TH axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Compensation step of 5TH axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Time constant of backlash compensation by 20 ascending and descending Delay time of strobe signals MF SF TF Width acceptable for M S T completion signal Setting range 0 9999 ms 292 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0203 Output time of reset signal 200 Setting range 50 400 ms 0204 Bits allowable for M codes Setting range 1 2 0205 Bits allowable for S codes Setting range 1 6 0206 Bits allowable for T codes Setting range 1 4 0210 Incremental amount for automatic sequence number 10 insertion Setting range 0 1000 0211 Tool offset heading number input disabled by MDI Setting range 0 9999 0212 Tool offset numbers input by MDI disabled Setting range 0 9999 0214 Error limit of arc radius 0 05 Setting range 0 1000 0 1000 mm 0216 Pitch error compensation number of X axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0217 Pitch error compensation number of Y axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0218 Pitch error compensation number
10. CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 3 The display modification and setting of the parameters 3 3 1 Parameter display Press key to enter parameter page There are BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO1 and MACRO2 modes in this page And they can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys the steps are as following 1 Bit parameter page Press BITPAR soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 1 BIT PARAMETER 000002 N0120 NO 0000 1 0 D ISO 0001 0 1 MIRX 0002 1 0 0 ASII SBI ASIO SBO 0003 1 1 0 0 O DIRS DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX INM 0004 1 1 0 0 0 0 XIK AZR SFD DLZ JAX 0005 0 0 0 0 90 Ox OK k ISC k DATA 0000 T0100 MDI BITPAR I NUMPAR MACRO1 MACRO2 Fig 3 3 1 See details about this parameter in Appendix 1 2 Number parameter page Press NUMPAR soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 2 NUM PARAMETER 000002 N0120 NO MEANING DATA 0000 1 0 channel select input output device 9 0001 communication channel 0 baud rate unit 100 384 0002 communication channel 1 baud rate 0003 screen protection wait time minute 0004 system interpolation period millisecond 0005 5TH of the sec ref pnt in machine crd system 0006 program axis name of each axis 0007 set axis name in basic coordinate system 0008 servo axis number of each axis 0009 STANDBY 0010 external workpiece origin point X offset 0 0000 oOCOowre oO OOLL external workpiece origin
11. 5 This U disk only displays the text file with the program name O five digit number for example 000001 11 2 2 U disk entry 1 2 Enter into the DATA page in lt SETTING gt page move the cursor to CNC part program in lt MDI gt mode press ENTER key then the U disk system begins to start see details in OPERATION Section 3 5 6 After entering into U disk program insert U disk 11 2 3 USB part program operation steps 1 To copy CNC programs from U disk to system disk a Press U disk soft key to switch to U disk file display b Press UP or DOWN key to select the CNC program in U disk c Press COPY soft key it prompts at the page bottom Are you sure to copy this file to system disk press lt CANCEL gt key to cancel the copy press lt ENTER gt key to start the copy and the page prompts copy After the copy is finished it prompts at the page bottom Copy is finished Note The operator should note that if there is a file with the same name in CNC storage 2 Note disk this file will be covered To delete files from U disk a Press U disk soft key to switch to U disk file display b Press UP or DOWN key to select the CNC program in U disk c Press DELETE soft key it prompts at the page bottom Are you sure to delete current file press lt CANCEL gt key to cancel the deletion press lt ENTER gt key to start the deletion d After the file is del
12. Main program G00 G90 M98 P9000 46 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G51 X50 0 Y50 0 11 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J1 M98 P9000 G50 Subprogram 09000 G00 G90 X60 0 Y60 0 G01 X100 0 F100 G01 Y100 G01 X60 0 Y60 0 M99 100 60 50 40 Restriction 1 The moving scaling of Z axis is ineffective in following canned cycles 1 The cut in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle G83 G73 2 Fine boring cycle G76 3 Offset value of X axis and Y axis in back boring cycle G87 2 In JOG mode the traverse distance can t be increased or decreased by scaling Note 1 The position is displayed by scaling coordinates Note 2 The result for an axis performing mirror image in a specified plane is as following 1 Circular instruction reverse direction of rotation 2 Tool radius compensation C reverse direction of offset 3 Coordinate system rotation reverse direction of rotation angle 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 A programmed shape can be rotated When a workpiece comprises some identical shapes 47 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual this function can be used for programming by prepairing a subprogram for the shape unit then calling it by rotation function Format G17 G68 X_Y_R_ or G18G68X_Z R_ or G19G68Y_ZR_ G69 Function G68 is use
13. Non modal G They are only effective in the block they are specified function and cancelled at the block end Non modal M function Modal G function Modal M function Non modal They are only effective in the block they are specified CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 5 Decimal point programming Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point A decimal point can be used when entering a distance time or speed Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses X Y Z A B C I J K R P Q and F Explanation 1 The decimal point programming are set by bit parameter NO 33 1 If bit parameter NO 33 1 1 the programming value unit is mm inch or deg if bit parameter NO 33 1 0 the programming value unit is the min moving unit which is set by bit parameter NO 5 1 2 The decimal part that is less than the min input incremental unit should be omitted Example X9 87654 When the min input incremental unit is 0 001mm it should be X 9 876 When the min input incremental unit is 0 0001mm it should be X 9 8765 20 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 Preparatory Function G code 4 1 Classification of G code Preparatory function is represented by G code with the number behind it which defines the meaning of the block that contains it G codes are devided by the following two types Classification Meaning Non modal
14. retraction trail that affects machined surface finish and the tool damage should be avoided in the operation Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point 84 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R level Q_ Offset of the hole bottom P_ Dwell time F_ Cutting feedrate K Number of fine boring repeats G76 G98 G76 G99 y Spindle CCW Oriented spindle dwell Point R Point Z Shift amount q When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops at a fixed rotation position and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip and retracted This ensures that the machined surface is not damaged and enables precise and efficient boring The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance and the retraction axis and direction are specified by bit parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 And Q is a positive value if Q is specified with a negative value the sign is ignored The hole bottom offset of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which should be specified carefully as it is also used for the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G76 us
15. to enter Machine Zero mode the characters machine zero will be displayed at the down right of the LCD screen 2 Select the axis X Y or Z for machine zero and its direction is set by bit parameter No 7 3 NO 7 5 3 The machine moves towards the machine zero Before the deceleration point is reached the machine traverses rapidly traverse speed set by number parameter No 100 No 102 then moves to the machine zero point i e reference point by a speed of FL set by number parameter No 099 if the machine touches the deceleration switch As the machine zero is reached the corresponding axis moving stops and the Machine Zero indicator lights up 9 3 Machine zero steps by program After the bit parameter No 4 3 is set for 0 the machine zero can be specified by G28 instruction Because it detects the stroke tongue this instruction is equivalent to manual machine zero 232 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note Note Note Note If the machine zero is not fixed on your machine don t perform the machine zero operation The indicator of the corresponding axis lights up when the machine zero is finished The indicator is gone out on condition that the axis is moved out from the machine zero by the operator Refer to the machine builder s manual for the direction of the machine zero reference point 233 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 10 Edit Operat
16. 0 8 mm min 0148 External acceleration limit of circular interpolation 1000 Setting range 100 500 0 mm s 0149 Lower limit of the external acceleration clamp for 200 circular interpolation Setting range 0 2000 mm min 0150 Acceleration clamp time constant of cutting feed 50 Setting range 0 1000 ms 0151 Maximum clamp speed of handwheel incomplete 2000 running Setting range 0 3000 mm min 0152 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 120 handwheel 288 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0166 Frequency dividing coefficient of XY axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0153 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant of handwheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0154 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel 100 Setting range 0 400 ms 0155 Maximum clamp speed of step feed 1000 Setting range 0 3000 mm min 0156 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 100 axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0157 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant 120 of axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0160 Multiplication coefficient of X axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0161 Multiplication coefficient of Y axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0162 Multiplication coefficient of Z axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 256 0163 Multiplication coefficient of 4TH axis instruction 1 CMR Setting range 1 256 0164 Multiplication
17. 010 9 AWK zcl ZCL 1 To cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point return 0 Not cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point return AWK 1 To change display immediately when workpiece origin offset is changed 0 To change next block display when workpiece origin offset is changed Standard setting 0000 0000 0 1 0 G52 RLC RLC 1 Tocancel local coordinate system after resetting 257 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 Not cancel local coordinate system after resetting G52 1 To add tool compensation vector at local coordinate system setting 0 Not add tool compensation vector at local coordinate system setting Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number olala BFA LZR ouT2 OUT2 1 Outer area entry of 2 stroke unallowed 0 Inner area entry of 2 stroke unallowed LZR 1 To perform travel check before manual reference point return after power on 0 Not perform travel check before manual reference point return after power on BFA 1 To make alarm after overtravel when overtravel instruction is given 0 To make alarm before overtravel when overtravel instruction is given Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0ol1 2 FDR RDR TDR RFO LRP RPD RPD 1 Manual ra
18. 1 By G92 see 4 2 11 for details 2 By Gcode from 54 to 59 see 4 2 8 for details 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming There are absolute and relative definitions to define the axis moving The absolute definition is the method of programming by the axis moving final point which is called absolute programming The relative definition is the method of programming by the axis moving which is called incremental programming 1 Absolute coordinate It is the target position coordinate in the specified workpiece coordinate system namely the position the tool to move to CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool 15 60 40 10 30 20 Move the tool from point A to point B using the B coordinate in G54 workpiece coordinate system the instruction is as following G90 G54X10 Y30 Z20 2 Relative coordinate It is the target position coordinate relative to the current position by taking the current position as the origin Tool For traversing the tool from point A to point B the instruction is as following GO G91 X 40 Y 30 Z 10 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 4 Mode and non mode The mode means that the address value set by a block is effective till it is reset by another block Another significance of it is that if a functional word is set it doesn t need to be input again if it is used in the following blocks gt e g for f
19. 1 Program input and output stop STOP key 0 Program input and output stop NC reset Standard setting 0000 1100 System parameter number 0 0 3 DIRS DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX INM axis axis INM 1 Min moving unit of linear axis Inch 0 Min moving unit of linear axis Metric If INM is set for 0 in metric output the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary is deg deg min If INM is set for 1 in inch output the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary is deg deg min DIRX 1 X axis feeding direction 0 X axis feeding direction reversing DIRY 1 Y axis feeding direction 0 Y axis feeding direction reversing DIRZ 1 Z axis feeding direction 0 Z axis feeding direction reversing DIR4 1 4 axis feeding direction 0 4 axis feeding direction reversing DIR5 1 5 axis feeding direction 0 5 axis feeding direction reversing Standard setting 0011 1110 System parameter number 00 4 xik AZR SFD JAX JAX 1 Synch controlled axes for manual reference point mode 1 axes only zero return mode 0 Synch controlled axes for manual reference point mode multiple axes SFD 1 Reference point offset use yes 255 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual AZR XIK Reference point offset use no For G28 when reference point not setup alarm For G28 wh
20. 1 Select mode lt Edit gt or lt Auto gt 2 Look up the target program in DIR page 3 Press key to enter the target program 4 Key in the word or sequence number to be searched and press UP or DOWN keys to look for it 5 Ifthe line number in program is needed to be searched press key key in the line number to be searched and press key for confirmation Note The search function is automatically cancelled when the sequence number word searching reaches the end of the program 10 1 1 4 Location of the cursor Select Edit mode then press key to display the program 237 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual a b c d e g h i Press key to shift the cursor upward for a line if the column where the cursor locates exceeds the end column of the last line the cursor moves to the end of the last line Press 7 key to shift the cursor downward for a line if the column where the cursor locates exceeds the end column of the next line the cursor moves to the end of the next line Press _ key to move the cursor for a column to the right if the cursor is at the line end it moves to the beginning of the next line Press key to move the cursor for a column to the left if the cursor is at the beginning of the line it moves to the end of the last line Press _ key to scroll the screen upward and the cursor moves to the first line and first column of the last page
21. 3 5 8 1 After entering this page in MDI mode move the cursor to the item to be altered 2 Key in the password under the corresponding level then press key If the password is correct the message Password is correct is issued by the system If not Password is not correct is issued 3 Modify the corresponding parameters and setting for the system password a The program on off is required to be set for ON during the parameter modification b K parameter is needed to be set for ON during the ladder modification 4 After modification the password is automatically deregistered after the system power off and reset 196 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 6 Graphic display Press key to enter the graphic page that has two display modes G PARA and GRAPH They can be switched over by pressing the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 6 1 GRAPH PARA 000000 N00120 O XY 1 XZ 2 Z 3 YZ 4 XYZ 5 ZXY AXES 0 GRPH MOD 0 0 GRPH CENT 1 MIN amp MAX AUTO ERA 0 0 OFF 1 ON SCALE 1 0000 GRPH CEN 0 0000 X COORDINATE GRPH CEN 0 0000 Y COORDINATE GRPH CEN 0 0000 Z COORDINATE AX X 240 0000 MAX Y 240 0000 MAX Z 240 0000 IN X 240 0000 MIN Y 240 0000 IN Z 240 0000 S0000 T0010 DATA MDI TG PARA GRAPH Fig 3 6 1 1 Graphic parameter page Press G PARA soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 6 1 A Graphic parameter
22. 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system Except 6 workpiece coordinate system standard workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used Format G54 Pn Pn specified additional workpiece coordinate system code Range 1 50 The setting and restriction of the additional workpiece coordinate system are the same as that of workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 37 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The workpiece zero offset in additional workpiece coordinate system can be set by G10 as following By instruction G10L20Pn XYZ Pn 0 The workpiece zero offset code for workpiece coordinate system specified n 1 to 50 Additional workpiece coordinate system code XYZ Set axis address and offset value for workpiece zero offset For absolute instruction G90 the value specified is the new offset value For incremental instruction G91 the new offset value can be gotten by adding the value specified to the current offset value By G10 instruction each workpiece coordinate system can be changed respectively 4 2 10 Machine coordinate system selection G53 Format G53 X_Y_Z_ Function To rapidly position the tool to the corresponding coordinate location in the machine coordinate system Explanation 1 While G53 is used in program the instruction coordinate behind it should be the coordinate in the machine coordinate system and the machine
23. 88 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 G86 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 Format G87 X_YZRQ_F Function It is used for accurate boring Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Offset of the hole bottom F Cutting feedrate G87 G98 G99 Oriented spindle dwell Spindle 1 4 dwell Initial level 0 gt Spindeccw S Spindle dwell gt Point Z After positioning along X and Y axis the tool is stopped after spindle orientation And the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip positioning is performed at the hole bottom point R level Then the tool is moved in the tool ti
24. Example Usage of canned cycle using tool length compensation Reference position a 1 6 drilling of a 10 hole 7 10 drilling of a 20 hole 11 13 boring of a 995 hole Retract position 250 Initial level 98 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual T 11 Value 200 is set in offset No 11 190 is set in offset No 15 150 is set in offset No 31 The program is as following N001 G92 X0 YO ZO Coordinate setting at reference point N002 G90 G00 Z250 T11 M6 Tool change NO003 G43 Z0 H11 Tool length compensation at initial level N004 S300 M3 Spindle start NO005 G99 G81 X400 Y 350 Z 153 R 97 F120 NO06 Y 550 Positioning then 2 drilling and point R level return NO007 G98 Y 750 Positioning then 3 drilling and initial level return NO008 G99 X1200 Positioning then 4 drilling and point R level return NO009 Y 550 Positioning then 5 drilling and point R level return N010 G98 Y 350 Positioning then 6 drilling and initial level return N011 GOO X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop Positioning then 1 drilling N012 G49 Z250 T15 M6 Tool length compensation cancel tool change N013 G43 Z0 H15 Initial level Tool length compensation N014 S200 M3 Spindle start N015 G99 G82 X550 Y 450 Z 130 R 97 P30 F70 N016 G98 Y 650 Positioning then 8 drilling and initial level return N017 G99 X1050 Positioning then 9
25. GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Reset key Press this key to reset the system feed and stop output Address i Press these keys to input address key e 4 Cancel Press this key to delete the characters entered not saved in key buffer Press this key to save the data into the buffer when numerical keys or address keys are pressed Press this key to display the help directory and PMC ladder Screen operation 1 2 Numerical i 3 Press these keys to input numerical numbers keys 5 Enter key Press any key of them to enter the corresponding interface introduced below Press these keys to change the page on the screen in the same Page keys display mode Press these keys to move the cursor in four directions Press these keys to move the cursor to the beginni th d 10 Edit keys y ginning or the en of the lines and the programs j Edit keys Press mese keys to sart modify and delete the programs words etc in program edit 163 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 2 3 Screen operation keys 9 page display keys and 1 help display key are laid out in this operator panel which are as following Position Program Parameter Offset page page page page Setting Graphic Diagnosis Alarm page page page page PLC page Index page Press this key to enter Relative coordinate absolute coordinate of current position page point comprehensive display program monitoring display by
26. PRG SPEED 0 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MDI EREL ABS ALL MONI Fig 3 1 5 The meaning of them is as following Programming speed Speed specified by F code Actual speed The actual cutting rate overriden Feedrate override Feed override selected by feedrate override keys Rapid override Rapid override selected by rapid override keys G codes The value of the G code in block being executed Tool offset H0000 tool length compensation for current program D0000 tool radius compensation for current program Parts count Plusing 1 when M30 is executed Run time Time counting start if Auto run starts time units are hour minute and second Sx Spindle override for spindle speed S00000 Actual feedback speed of spindle encoder T0000 Tool number specified by T code in program Note The parts counting is reserved after the power down The clearing ways 1 Switchover to POSITION mode 2 Press key the cursor locates to the PRT CNT item input data and press key to confirm if key is pressed the parts counting will be cleared 3 Shift UP or DOWN key to RUN TIME 179 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 Press key to clear the RUN TIME Note 1 To display the actual spindle speed the encoder must be applied to the spindle Note 2 The actual speed the
27. SP SPE use 312
28. Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 3 POSM Suk DNC DNC 1 To clear DNC running program display by pressing reset key 0 Not clear DNC running program display by pressing reset key SUK 1 To display program list by program numbers 0 To display program list by logging time POSM 1 Mode displayed on program monitoring page 0 Mode not displayed on program monitoring page Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 02 4 RHD NPA SGD sPs svs 262 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual SVS SPS SGD NPA RHD To display servo setting page 0 Not display servo setting page To display spindle setting page 0 Not display spindle setting page 1 To display servo wave 0 Not display servo wave To switch to alarm page when alarm occurs 0 Not switch to alarm page when alarm occurs 1 To update the relative position display at MPG interruption Not update the relative position display at MPG interruption Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 025 ALM DGN GRA SET OFT PAR PRG Pos POS 1 To switchover page by repressing POSITION key in position page 0 Not switchover page by repressing POSITION key in position page PRG 1 To switchover page by repressing PROGRAM key in program page 0 Not switchover page by
29. ZMiz ZMly ZMIx AXS5 Axs4 AXS4 1 Set 4 axis for linear axis 0 Set 4 axis for rotary axis 256 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual AXS5 1 Set 5 axis for linear axis 0 Set 5 axis for rotary axis ZMIx 1 Direction setting of X axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of X axis reference point return positive ZMly 1 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return positive ZMlz 1 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return positive ZMI4 1 Direction setting of 4th axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of 4th axis reference point return positive ZMI5 1 Direction setting of 5th axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of 5th axis reference point return positive Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number o 0 8 IRRLx RABx ROAx ROAx 1 Rotation axis cycle effective 0 Rotation axis cycle ineffective RABx 1 Rotation direction setting of absolute instruction instruction value sign 0 Rotation direction setting of absolute instruction near to the target RRLx 1 Moving amount per revolution rounding for relative coordinates 0 Moving amount per revolution not rounding for relative coordinates Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number
30. mm min specified by parameter F Explanation 1 X_ Y_Z_are the final point coordinate which concerns the coordinate system refer to 3 3 1 3 3 3 sections 2 The feedrate specified by F is effective till the new F code is specified The feedrate by F code is got by an interpolation along a line if F code is not specified in program the feedrate uses the default value when the power is on see number parameter P87 for the setting Program example see Fig 4 2 2 1 Y axis G01 X200 Y100 F200 End position Note Each axis feedrate is as following 0 Startposition 200 0 diag G01 Xa YB ZyFf In this block 25 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual LF Feedrate in X axis FY 5 xf a Feedrate in Y axis Fy a xf Feedrate in Z axis F ee L L 4 Fig 4 2 2 1 Note 1 The instruction parameters except F are all positioning parameter And the upper limit of the feedrate F can be set by number parameter P94 If the actual federate using override exceeds the upper limit it is restricted to the upper limit and its unit is mm min The lower limit of the feedrate F can be set by number parameter P95 If the actual federate using override exceeds the lower limit it is restricted to the lower limit and its unit is mm min Note 2 If the positioning parameter behind G01 is not specified the tool doesn t move and the system only changes the tool current mode for G 01 mode The system de
31. of rapid 4TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0109 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid 5TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0110 S type time constant of pre acceleration f 100 deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0111 S type time constant of pre acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0112 S type time constant of pre acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0113 S type time constant of pre acceleration 1 deceleration of rapid 4TH axis i Setting range 0 400 ms 0114 S type time constant of pre acceleration 100 deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0115 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0116 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0117 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 285 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0118 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 4TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0119 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0120 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0121 E
32. 0 1000 mm min 0094 FO rapid override of axis for all axes 30 Maximum feedrate for all axes 8000 Setting range 300 9999 mm min Maximum control speed in non forecast mode 283 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0095 Minimum feedrate for all axes Setting range 0 300 mm min Minimum control speed in non forecast mode 0096 Maximum speed in forecasting control mode for all 6000 axes Setting range 300 9999 mm min 0097 Minimum speed in forecasting control mode for all axes Setting range 0 300 mm min 0098 Feedrate of manual continuous feed for axes JOG 2000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0099 Speed FL of reference point return for all axes 0 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0100 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0101 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0102 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0103 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0104 5 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0105 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 400 of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0106 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 400 of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 284 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0107 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 400 of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0108 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100
33. 0000 6 G59_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0045 X coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0046 Y coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0047 Z coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0048 4TH coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 279 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0049 5TH coordinate of the 1st reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0050 X coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0051 Y coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0052 Z coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0053 4TH coordinate of the 2nd reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0054 5TH coordinate of the 2nd reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0055 X coordinate of the 3rd referenc
34. 1 13 Spindle blowing on and off M44 M45 Instruction M44 M45 Itis used to control the spindle blowing 148 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 1 14 Auto tool change start and end M50 M51 Instruction M50 M51 Itis used to control the start and end of auto tool change 5 1 15 Tool judging after tool change M53 Instruction M53 It is used to judge the tool after the tool change 5 2 Mcodes used by program M codes used by program are classified for main program type and macro type If the M code for program and the move instruction are in a same block the move instruction will be executed before M code 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 M02 When M30 M02 in the program is executed in auto mode the auto mode is cancelled The blocks following them are not executed and the spindle and cooling stops The control returns to the beginning of the program while the numbers of the workpiece machined added by 1 Under any situations M30 M02 is regarded as the end of the program execution M30 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 to return to program beginning M02 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 2 to return to program beginning Note 1 M codes such as MOO M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 can t be specified together with other M codes they must be specified in single blocks or alarm is issued by system Note 2 These M codes include the M codes sent to machine by CNC and the CNC inner operation codes s
35. 10ms 7 See the details for common variables operation in OPERATION manual input mode section 4 7 3 Custom macro call When G65 is specified the custom macro specified by address P is called and the data are transferred to custom macro body by arguments Format G65 P L lt By arguments gt L Number of the custom macro body called Calling times Behind G65 code P is used to specify custom macro number L is used to specify custom macro calling times and the arguments are used to transfer data to custom macro If repetition is needed specify the repetition times behind L code if L is omitted the default time is 1 If it is specified by arguments the values will be assigned to the corresponding local variables Note 1 Ifthe subprogram number specified by address P is not retrieved an alarm PS 078 will be issued 139 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note 2 No 90000 99999 subprograms are the system reserved programs if they are called they can be executed but the cursor will rest on at M98 block and the program interface displays the main program all the time 4 7 4 Operation and transfer instruction 1 Format G65 Hm P i Q j R k m 01 99 represent the operation or transfer function i Variable name for saving operation result j Variable name 1 for operation Or a constant which is expessed directly without
36. 3 5 7 Password authority setting and modification To prevent the part programs and CNC parameter from malicious modification the password authority setting is available in this GSK218M system It is classified for 5 levels which are the 1 level system manufacturer the 2 level machine builder the 3 level system debugger the 4 level terminal user the 5 level operator by descending sequence The system defaults the lowest level at power on See Fig 3 5 8 The 1st and the 2nd level The modifications of mode parameters number parameters tool offset data and PLC ladders transfer etc are allowed in these levels The 3rd level The modifications of CNC mode parameters number parameters tool offset 195 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual data etc are allowed in this level The 4th level The modifications of macro variables tool offset data are allowed in this level But the modifications of CNC mode parameters number parameters pitch compensation data are not allowed in this level The 5th level No password The operation of the machine operator panel is allowed in this level but the modifications of tool offset parameters CNC mode parameters number parameters pitch compensation data are not allowed SETTING PASSWORD 000002 N0000 SYSTEM PSW NEW AGAIN MACHINE PSW NEW AGAIN DEBUG PSW EW uu AGAIN USER PSW AGAIN S0000 T0100 EDIT 4 DATA PSW Fig
37. 6 2 To use parameters set up or change forbidden area Even the coordinate sequence of the 2 points is wrongly given in storage stroke detection 2 a rectangular forbidden area can also be formed by these 2 points taken as the vertex 173 CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual When the forbidden area is set by number parameter P76 P85 the distance output increment in the machine coordinate system must be given by a min command incremental unit via data b When the forbidden area is specified by program instructions by G12 it forbids the tool to enter forbidden area by G13 it allows the tool to enter the forbidden area Each G12 or G13 code must be specified by a single block in program The following commands are used for setting up or changing the forbidden area G12 X_Y_Z_ _ JK X Y Z I J K X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X I gt Min command incremental unit Y J gt Min command incremental unit ZK gt C Min command incremental unit Z mm F 7500 F rapid traverse speed mm min Fig 2 6 3 To set up or change forbidden area by program If the distance input increment in the machine coordinate system is specified by min input incremental unit via G12 the programming data will be converted to the value of min command unit by min incremental unit And the value will be used by the parameter 3 Detection point in the forbidden area prior to the programming for forbidden area pleas
38. 90 to 270 2 Except above conditions in arc machining the included angle between the start point and the end point of the tool center path is much different from that of the program path above 180 Example Tool center path Programmed path The directions of these two paths are diferent 180 SS Tool center path Programmed path lt x The directions of these two paths are diferent 180 12 Manual operation See the manual operation in Operation section for the manual tool radius compensation If the tool length compensation is performed in tool radius compensation the offset value of the tool radius is regarded to be changed 13 Precautions for offset Ca To specify offset value The offset value number is specified by D code Once specified D code is effective till another one is specified or offset is cancelled Besides the offset value for the tool radius compensation it is also used for tool offset value 123 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual b To change the offset value Usually during tool change the offset value must be changed in offset cancel mode If it is changed in offset mode the new offset value is obtained at the block end Offset by black 6 Offset by black 7 N6 Ne Cc Positive and negative tool offset value and tool center path If the offset value is negative G41 and G42 is exchanged in program If the tool cent
39. CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 Monitoring mode Itenters MONI mode by pressing MONI soft key in this mode the absolute coordinate relative coordinate of the current position as well as the current running program modal message and blocks can be displayed together See Fig 3 1 4 MONITOR 000002 N0120 RELATIVE ABSOLUTE G00 G17 G90 G94 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 G54 G21 G40 G49 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 G80 G98 G15 G50 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 F 1000 AF 0 S 1000 M 3 H 0000 D 000002 N0060 X100 N0180 Y100 Ln 2 S0000 T0100 AUTO Fig 3 1 4 Note 1 The display in MONI mode can be set by BIT6 of the parameter NO 023 when BIT6 0 the machine coordinate but the modal instruction is displayed at the original position Note2 In lt MACHINE ZERO gt lt STEP gt lt JOG gt lt MPG gt modes the intermediate coordinate system is a relative one while in lt AUTO gt lt MDI gt lt DNC gt modes it is a remaining distance 3 1 2 The display of the run time part count programming speed and override actual speed etc The programming speed the actual speed feedrate and rapid override G codes tool offset run time part number spindle override spindle speed tools etc can be displayed in lt POSITION gt absolute or relative mode see Fig 3 1 5 178 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ACT POS RELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 56 0000
40. Connection and PLC manual for the PLC ladder modification and relevant message 3 10 Index display Press the key to display the alarm page there are 7 modes OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO PLCADDR CALCULA inthis page which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 10 1 to Fig 3 10 7 1 OPRT interface In lt INDEX gt page press OPRT soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 1 INDEX INFO OPERATION 000001 N00000 MDI data MDImode input value gt Enter Search NO any mode press SER key gt NO gt Enter POS interface Rel coord clear rel coord interface X Y Z gt cancel Rel coord mediating REL interface X Y Z gt Enter PRT CNT clear REL or ABS interface CHG gt Enter RUN TIME clear REL or ABS CHG gt down key gt Enter MPG interrupt clear ALL interface X Y Z gt cancel PAR interface BITPAR PAR SWITCH ON MDI mode input value gt Ln 01 120 S0000 T0000 EDIT ALARM G CODEJ PARA MACRO DP Fig 3 10 1 The manual operation steps for various interfaces are introduced in lt INDEX gt page you 206 CGSN I HISU GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual may find the corresponding introduction in INDEX pages if you are unfamiliar with some operations 2 ALARM interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 2 In lt INDEX gt page press ALARM softkey to enter this interface INDEX INFO ALARMS 00000
41. E a g Z 0 0000 ACT APEED 0 Ei i Tat wath y az FEEDOVRD 100 RAPIDOVRD 100 S0000 T0100 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL I SsERVO I gt Fig 3 5 4 2 Usage 193 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The functions of all soft keys on machine soft panel are identical with that of the keys on machine panel In this page the soft keys correspond to the machine operator panel keys to the right of the displayer by the key s up right letter signs one by one The corresponding indicator on the machine panel and the up left indicator of the soft panel light up if a soft key is selected which is consistent with the key operation on the machine panel The soft key operations are set by bit parameters No 57 0 No 57 5 No 57 6 No 57 7 3 5 5 Servo page Press SERVO soft key to enter this page it is shown as following See Fig 3 5 5 SETTING SERVO 000002 NO00120 X AXIS Y AXIS Z AXIS PROPORTION 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 INTEGRAL 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 DIERENTIAL 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FEEDBACK 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SET PERIOD 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FIL TER 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FEED DIRECT 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 CMR 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FEEDGEARN M 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 REF COUNTER 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 DATA S00000 T0010 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 5 In this page servo transmission parameters can be modified but user needs to get a well kno
42. G2 X 20 Y 40 l 50 Restriction 1 If address l J K and R are specified together in program the arc specified by R is in priority and others are ignored 2 If both arc radius parameter and the parameter from the start point to the circle center are not specified error message will be issued by system 3 Ifthe circle is to be interpolated only the parameters J K from start point to circle center but the parameter R can be specified 4 Attention should be paid to the coordinate plane selection when the circular interpolation is being done 5 If X Y Z are all omitted i e the start point and the final point coincides as well as R is specified e g GO2R50 the tool doesn t move B Helical interpolation Format G02 G03 30 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Arc of XY plane G17 pir Pee rA I F G03 SAE ie R E Arc of ZX plane G02 IEK S s ae Arc of YZ plane G19 she A ae ee Sn J_K_ P G03 aa R Function It is used to move the tool to a position specified from current position by a feedrate specified by parameter F in a helical path Explanation Tool path The feedrate along the circumference of two cir cular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate The first two bits of the instruction parameter are positioning parameter The parameter words are the two axes name X Y or Z in current plane These two positioning parameters specify the position the tool
43. G24 G25 Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G24 instruction Start ES M a a e a a Ea point x25 AA 50 z 5 g En A ee oe ae ee xo Y jt 0 Center 50 3s 53 a G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G24 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J10 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the inner circle fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 3 Outer circle fine milling cycle G26 G32 Format G26 G98 G99 Xx Y Z R LJ D F K G32 Function They are used to fine mill a circle outside a circle by the specified radius and direction and the tool returns after milling Explanation For these instructions refer to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G26 CCW outer circle fine milling 67 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G32 CW outer circle fine milling I Fine milling circle radius ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use the absolute value if it is a negative one J Distance from the milling start point to milling circle center ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use the absolute value if it is a negative one D Tool radius number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool radius value is obtained by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process d Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the
44. H GEOM D WEAR D 001 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 002 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 003 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 004 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 005 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 006 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 007 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 008 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 009 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 010 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 CT POS RELATIVE X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 DATA S0000 T0010 MDI CINPUT INPUT INPUT RETURN gt Fig 3 4 2 The offset value may be input directly or operated with the actual position value H stands for length compensation and D for radius compensation 2 Pitch X page Press PITCH X soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 4 3 X PIT ERROR MOST 256 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0000 0 0012 0 0024 0 0001 0 0013 0 0025 0 0002 0 0014 0 0026 0 0003 0 0015 0 0027 0 0004 0 0016 0 0028 0 0005 0 0017 0 0029 0 0006 0 0018 0 0030 0 0007 0 0019 0 0031 0 0008 0 0020 0 0032 0 0009 0 0021 0 0033 0 0010 0 0022 0 0034 0 0011 0 0023 0 0035 0 DATA 0000 T0100 EDIT L OFFSET PITCHX PITCHY PITCH Z PITCH 41 gt Fig 3 4 3 Note The display of pitch offset for Y Z 4 5 axis is the same as that of X axis 3 4 2 Modification and setting of the offset value 3 4 2 1 Modification and setting of the offset value The steps for tool offset in Tool Offset page are as follows 188 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 Press
45. N3 X450 4 N4 G3 X500 Y1150 R650 5 N5 G2 X900 R 250 6 N6 G3 X950 Y900 R650 108 CGS I HISE GSK218M CNC SYSTEM 7 N7 G1 X1150 8 N8 Y550 9 N9 X700 Y650 10 N10 X250 Y550 11 1 11 N11 GO G40 XO YO C1 700 1300 P3 450 900 P9 700 650 Y axis ty GY Start positior Programmed origin 4 5 3 Explanation of tool radius compensation X axis Conception P4 500 1150 P5 900 1150 P6 950 900 Programming and Operation Manual y C2 1550 1550 be P7 1150 900 Unit mm Inner side and outer side when an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move instructions for two blocks is over 180 it is called inner side when the angle is between 0 and 180 it is called outer side Programmed path Workpiece Workpiece Programmed path a 180 Meanings of symbols 109 180 2a 0 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The following symbols are used in following figures S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc indicates the tool radius compensation value An intersection is a position at which t
46. POSITION gt interface it displays a step 0 100 See Fig 5 1 1 ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 STEP W 0 100 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MDI TREL ABS ALL MONI Fig 5 1 1 The machine axis moves 0 1mm when pressing this key once 5 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction X axis may be moved in positive or negative direction by pressing axis and direction key IL or _ Press the key once the corresponding axis will be moved for a step distance defined by system And the feedrate can be overridden by pressing override keys The operation for X or Z axis is identical with that of X axis The manual synchronous 3 axes moving is not supported in this system but the synchronous 3 axes zero returning is 216 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 1 3 Step feed explanation 1 The step moving speed is identical with the JOG feedrate nor As Ad RAPID 2 The rapid override is effective after the key is pressed for rapid traverse 5 2 Step interruption While the program running in Auto MDI DNC mode is shifted to Step mode by dwell the control will execute the step interruption The coordinate system of step interruption is consistent with that of MPG and the operation of it is also the same as that o
47. SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 The N1 block cuts a workpiece Tool Block start point N1 2 The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold key in the middle of the N1 block point A N2 N1 PointA 3 After retracting the tool manually to point B tool movement is restarted LY Point B Manual intervention N1 PointA 4 After automatic return to point A the remaining move command of the N1 block is executed N1 PointA 4 2 Spindle control 4 2 1 Spindle CCW Cow The spindle is started for CCW rotation if this key is pressed in JOG MPG Step mode after S speed is specified in MDI mode 4 2 2 Spindle CW M The spindle is started for CW rotation if this key is pressed in Manual MPG Step mode after S speed is specified in MDI mode 213 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 3 Spindle stop di The spindle is stopped if this key is pressed in Manual MPG Step mode 4 2 4 Spindle auto gear shift The frequency conversion control or gear control for spindle is set by the parameter No 1 2 If parameter No 1 2 1 the spindle auto gears are controlled by PLC Three gears 1 to 3 gear are available in this system the maximum speed of each gear is set by parameter P246 P247 P248 respectively which can be output by modifying the ladder During the spindle CW or CCW rotation in JOG or Auto mode the increase or decrease for the corresponding spindle gear can be adjusted b
48. SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Feed rate JOG Fo Feedrate T Acceleration deceleration time constant for a cut ting and JOG feed parameter 047 Time 7 6 Acceleration deceleration for corner of a block For example if Y axis moves in a block and X axis moves in the block following the tool path is as following during the Y axis deceleration and the X axis acceleration Insert a dwell instruction here H Programmed path gt Actual tool path If the dwell exact stop instruction is inserted the tool moves along the real line as in above figure by the program Otherwise the bigger the cutting feedrate is or the longer the time constant of the acceleration deceleration the bigger the arc at the corner is For circular instruction the actual arc radius of the tool path is smaller than the radius given by the program Under the condition allowed by mechanical system reduce the time constant of the acceleration deceleration as far as possible to decrease the error at the corner 159 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 8 Tool Function 8 1 Tool function By specifying a numerical value up to128 following address T tools can be selected on the machine Only one T code can be specified in a block Refer to the machine builder s manual for the number with address T and the corresponding machine operation of T code When a move instruction and a T
49. Setting range 0 1000 0351 r value by tool length measurement Setting range 0 9999 9999 0352 e value by tool length measurement Setting range 0 9999 9999 0356 Workpieces machined Setting range 0 9999 0357 Total workpieces to be machined Setting range 0 9999 0358 Accumulative time of power on hour Setting range 0 9999 0360 Accumulative time of cutting hour Setting range 0 9999 0361 Tool life management signal ignored Setting range 0 9999 0362 Tool life left using times Setting range 0 9999 302 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0363 Tool life left using time Setting range 0 9999 0365 Number of MPG used Setting range 0 9999 0366 Handwheel sliding amount allowable Setting range 0 10 0371 Positioning error allowable for reverse X axis 0 0050 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0372 Positioning error allowable for reverse Y axis 0 0050 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0373 Positioning error allowable for reverse Z axis 0 0050 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0374 Positioning error allowable for reverse 4TH axis 0 0050 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0375 Positioning error allowable for reverse 5TH axis 0 0050 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm As the set backlash compensation value P0190 P0194 of an axis is over the reverse positioning allowable error P0371 P0375 of this axis the speed at the end point of a single block lowers to minimum speed be
50. The circle center can also be specified by radius R besides l J K G02 X_Y_R_ G03 X_Y_R_ 1 Two arcs can be drawn out as following one arc is more than 180 the other one is less than 180 The radius of the arc more than 180 should be specified by a negative value e g Fig 2 4 4 3 as arc is less than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R50 F300 as arc 2 is more than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R 50 F300 28 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual i point Start point Fig 2 4 4 3 2 The arc equal to 180 can be programmed either by J K or by R Example G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 110 F100 Equal to G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R10 F100 or G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R 10 F100 Note For the arc 180 the positive or negative value of R doesn t affect the arc path 3 The arc equal to 360 can only be programmed by I J K Program example 100 n2 60 gt Start point PT ge Seems rer Spee rere 120 140 200 The tool path programming for Fig 2 4 4 4 is as following 1 Absolute programming 29 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G90 GO X200 Y40 Z0 G3 X140 Y100 R60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 R50 Or GO X200 Y40 Z0 G90 G3 X140 Y100 I 60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 I 50 2 Incremental programming G0 G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 R60 F3000 G2 X 20 Y 40 R50 Or G0 G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 l 60 F300
51. X 0 0000 y 0 00000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 00000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 EXT G54 001 G54 002 X 0 00000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 00000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 00000 zZ 0 0000 Z 0 0000 DATA S0000 T0010 MDI K SETTING SWITCH G54G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 3 2 192 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 There two ways for coordinate entry 1 After entering this page in lt MDI gt mode move the cursor to the coordinate system to be altered Press the axis name to be assigned and then press oe key for confirmation the value in current machine coordinate system will be set for the origin of the G coordinate system e g If X is pressed and then E key the X machine coordinate of a point is entered automatically by system Another example if X10 is entered and then press T key which means X machine coordinate is 10 and X 10 may also be entered 2 After entering this page in lt MDI gt mode move the cursor to the coordinate axis to be altered input the machine coordinates or other values directly to define the G coordinate system origin press l l key for confirmation 3 5 4 Display and setting of the machine soft panel 1 Press PANEL soft key to enter machine panel page which is shown as following See Fig 3 5 4 MACHINE PANEL 000002 N0120 RELATIVE X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 ABSOLUTE X 0 0000 4 Ba El Z Y 4ih Y 0 0000 7 DE a O
52. Z y Program gt x x Coordinate system Part drawing CNC Instruction Machine tool In order to make the tool to cut the workpiece to the figure on drawing by instruction program according to drawing in the workpiece coordinate system specified by CNC the relation of the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system must be determined CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The method to determine the relation of these two coordinate systems is called alignment It can be done by different methods such as part figure workpiece quantity I By part base point IL When part is fixed on jig Reference position Workpiece basic point Jig Fixed distance To align the tool center to the Because the tool center can t be workpiece base point specify thel located at the workpiece base point locate workpiece coordinate system by CNCithe tool to a position or reference point instructions at this position and _ thel that has a distance to the base point set workpiece coordinate system coincides with ine workpiece coordinate system by this the programming coordinate system distance e g G92 Workpiece coordinate system should be set for each processing program to select a workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system set can be changed by moving its origin There are two methods to set the workpiece coordinate system
53. as Cut Copy Paste Retraction Find Replace Serial menu It is mainly used for the open and setting of the serial ports Transfer menu 246 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual It involves the transfer types of DNC file sending file receiving 5 View menu It is used for the tool column display and hiding 6 Help menu It is used to view the software version 11 1 3 Software usage 1 DNC transfer 1 Open the program file by the OPEN button in File menu or the Gren button in tool column do a further editing by this software if necessary Open and set the serial port the default DNC baudrate is 38400 which can be reset by the parameter refer to GSK218M Operation Manual The data bit has 8 stop bit has 1 and there is no parity check Data bit stop bit and parity check can t be changed The sequence of the 1 and 2 step can be exchanged which doesn t affect the following transfer and machining but the following steps must be operated by sequence or the transfer and machining will be affected As the CNC system and machine are ready press the key on panel Open the DNC item in Transfer type menu or press the DNC transfer button oe Communi c in tool column to transfer data As Sent Bytes stops press the key on panel to receive data then press k l J i key to start running Then operate by normal machining pattern During the transmission the transfer
54. axis is not in the ZX plane so the Y axis moving is irrelevant to ZX plane G18Y_ Annotation Only the canned cycle in G17 plane is available in this system at present For criterion or astringency plane should be expressly defined in the corresponding block especially in a system used by many users which can avoid the incident or abnormity caused by programming error 4 2 13 Polar coordinate system setup cancel G16 G15 Format G16 G15 Function G16 is used for the setup of the polar coordinate system of the positioning parameter G15 is used for the cancellation of the polar coordinate system of the positioning parameter Explanation No command parameter If G16 is set the coordinate value can be input by polar coordinate radius and angle The positive of angle is the CCW direction of the 1 axis positive direction in a plane selected while the negative is CW direction Both the radius and angle can use the absolute or incremental 41 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual instructions G90 G91 If G16 is used the 1 axis of the positioning parameter of the tool moving command represents the polar radius in polar coordinate system the 2 axis of that represents the polar angle in polar coordinate system If G15 is specified the polar coordinate system can be cancelled and the control returns to the Cartesian coordinate system The definition of the polar coordinate system origin 1 In G90 absolute m
55. be done on a basis of good understanding of the programming limitation of machine builder manual besides this manual 2 2 General structure of a program The program is classified for main program and subprogram Generally the CNC system is acutated by the main program If the main program contains the subprogram call the CNC system acts by the subprogram If the subprogram contains the instruction of returning to main program the CNC system returns to the main program to go on execution The program execution sequence is shown as Fig 2 4 CGiSR I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Main program Subprogram Instruction 1 Instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 2 pea the direction of the pea rogram Instruction n Instruction n 1 Return to the main program Fig 2 4 Program execution sequence The structure of the subprogram is same as that of the main program If there are fixed sequence blocks occurring repeatedly in a program it can be taken as a subprogram which can be stored in the memory in advance with no need to be edited repeatedly So it can simplify the program The subprogram can be called in Auto mode usually by M98 in the main program And the subprogram called can also call other subprograms The subprogram called from the main program is called the 1 level subprogram 4 levels subprogram at most can be called in a program Fig 2 5 The last block in the subprogram must be th
56. changing soft keys Pesara Press this key to enter Program MDI current mode current time program page program page directory display by changing soft keys and program directory is switched over by page keys Position page Press this key to enter Bit parameter number parameter and macro parameter page variable page display by changing soft keys to view and modify the parameter Parameter page Offset Press this key to enter 2 pages used to set the tool length and radius and page offset page the pitch error compensation of each axis by changing soft keys Settin Press this key to enter 2 pages setting parameter on off coordinate ae program page panel servo system data and password setting display by changing soft keys Press this key to enter For graphic parameter graphic display page and the setting page graphic center dimension ratio and display page page f setting by changing soft keys Diagnosis Press this key to enter To view the I O signals in the system by changing Alarm Press this key to enter To view alarm display pages by changing soft keys i 164 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Press this key to enter To view the corresponding system version the I O PMC page PMC page configuration and modify PLC ladder in Edit mode by changing soft keys iaeendee Press this key to enter To view the corresponding system message by Page index page changing so
57. cursor to the character to be altered c Key in the new character d Press the REPLACE soft key the character where the cursor locates will be replaced by the new one The block replacement can also be done by the key on the panel see details in Section 10 1 1 5 10 1 8 Rename of a program Rename the current program a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page cursor specifies the program name c Press address key key in the new name d Press key to complete the renaming 10 1 9 Program restart The program restart function is used under the situation that accident occurs during running such as tool braking off system restarting after power off emergency stop After the accident is eliminated this function can be used for returning to program braking off position to go on 242 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual execution and retracting to original point by GOO The steps for program restart are as following 1 Solve the machine accident such as tool change offset changing machine zero T 2 In lt AUTO gt mode press the key on the panel 3 Press key to enter the program page then press RESTART soft key to enter program restart interface Fig 10 1 9 PROGRAM RESTART 000014 N00012 LOADED MODAL CURRENT MODAL G01 G49 F 3000 G00 G49 F 300 G17 G80 S 1000 G17 G80 S 1000 G90 G98 M03 09 G90 G98 M 30 G94 GI5 T 0003 G94 GI5 T 0003 G54 G50 H 0000 G54 G50 H 000
58. datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level In feeding per minute the relation between the thread lead and feedrate as well as spindle speed is as following Feedrate F tap pitchxspindle speed S For example for the M12x1 5 thread hole on the workpiece the following parameter can be used 500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min For multi start thread F value can be gotten by multiplying the thread number Example M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G84 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning tap hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning tap hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning tap hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning tap hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina 82 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 12 Left handed tapping cycle G74 Format G74 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_ Function It is used for tapping cycle In this ta
59. drilling and point R level return N018 G98 Y 450 Positioning then 10 drilling and initial level return Positioning then 7 drilling and point R level return N019 G00 X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop N020 G49 Z250 T31 M6 Tool length compensation cancel tool change N021 G43 Z0 H31 Initial level Tool length compensation N022 S100 M3 Spindle start N023 G85 G99 X800 Y 350 Z 153 R47 F50 N024 G91 Y 200 Positioning then 12 13 drilling and point R level Y 200 return Positioning then 11 drilling and point R level return CGSR I Hist GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual N025 GOO G90 X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop N026 G49 ZO Tool length compensation cancel N027 M30 Program stop 4 5 Tool compensation G code 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 Function G43 specifies the positive compensation for tool length G44 specifies the negative compensation for tool length G49 is used to cancel tool length compensation Format There are 2 modes A B for tool length offset which are set by bit parameter No 39 0 in this system Mode A G43 Z H G44 Mode B G17 G43 Z_H G17 G44 Z H G18 G43 Y_H G18 G44 Y_H G19 G43 X_H G19 G44 X_H Tool length offset mode cancel G49 or HO Explanation The instruction above is used to shift an offset value for the end point of specified axi
60. execution can be viewed by switching to lt POSITION gt lt MONI gt lt GRAPH gt etc interfaces The program execution is started from the line where the cursor locates so check that A gt whether the cursor is located at the program to be executed before pressing the LE STAR key If 222 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual the cursor is not located at the start line from which the program is to be executed press reset key Il then press E STA key to run the program automatically from the start line 7 3 Auto run stop In Auto run to make the program being executed automatically to be stopped five ways are provided in this system 1 Program stop MOO After the block containing MOO is executed the auto running pauses and the modal message is saved If U key is pressed the program execution is continued 2 Program optional stop M01 If the OPTIONAL STOP M01 key is pressed during the program execution the automatic running pauses and the modal message is saved when the block containing M01 is being y executed If U key is pressed the program execution is continued 3 Press u key If the key is pressed during the auto running the machine status is 1 Machine feeding slows down and stops 2 Dwell continues if Dwell is being executed G04 instruction 3 The remaining modal message is saved q 4 The program execution is continued after k
61. hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y75 Positioning and drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference point M5 Spindle stop M30 Note The chip removal operation is still performed though Q is omitted in the machining of the holes from 2 to 6 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 Format G81 X_Y_Z_ R_F_K_ Function Itis used for normal drilling feed to the hole bottom then the tool rapidly retracts from the hole bottom Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R level F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if necessary 76 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G81 G98 G81 G99 Initial level Point R Point R Aij R level Point Z amp Point Z Z R The hole bottom parameter Z and R must be correctly specified while performing the 1 drilling operation omitting unallowable or the alarm occurs If parameter P Q are specified they are ignored by system After positioning along X and Z axes the tool traverses to point R level to perform the drilling from point R level to point Z level
62. if it is scrolled to the program beginning the cursor locates at the second line and the first column of the page Press l key to scroll the screen downward and the cursor moves to the first line and first column of the next page if it is scrolled to the program end the cursor locates at the last line and the first column of the program Press key the cursor moves to the beginning of the line it locates Press EE keys the cursor moves to the beginning of the program Press key the cursor moves to the end of the line it locates Press keys the cursor moves to the end of the program 238 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 10 1 1 5 Insertion deletion and modification of word Select lt EDIT gt mode then press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the position to be edited 1 Word insertion After keying in the data press key the data will be inserted to the left of the cursor 2 Word deletion Locate the cursor to the word to be deleted press key the word will be deleted If the key is pressed continuously the words to the right of the cursor will be deleted 3 Word modification Move the cursor to the place to be modified and key in the new content then press key to replace the old content by the new one 10 1 1 6 Deletion of a single block Select lt EDIT gt mode then press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block
63. in the last character of the blocks to be copied c Press key the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be copied d Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press key to complete the paste The copy of the program can also be done in the program edit page 1 Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied 2 Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied 3 Press COPY soft key the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be copied 241 CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press PASTE soft key to complete the paste Note If several words to be copied are same in program it will copy the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location 10 1 6 Cut and paste of block Steps of block cut are as following a Enter the program edit page as Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block to be cut c Key in the last character of the block to be cut d Press the CUT soft key the block will be cut into clip board e Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted and press PASTE soft key the block will be pasted Note If several words to be cut are same in program it will cut the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location 10 1 7 Replacement of the blocks Steps of block replacement are as following a Enter the program edit page Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the
64. incremental feeding Some parameters The G code status at power on is the same as that in power off 1 _Inch metric conversion can t be executed during the program execution 2 The tool compensation value must be preset by the minimum incremental input unit when inch system is converted to metric system or the reverse 3 For the 1 G28 instruction the running from the intermediate point is the same as the JOG reference point return when inch system is converted to metric system or the reverse 4 When the minimum incremental input unit is different from the minimum command unit the maximum error that is not accumulated is the half of the minimum command unit 5 The inch metric system for program input can be set by bit parameter NO 00 2 6 The inch metric system for program output can be set by bit parameter NO 03 0 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner rounding Format L_ chamfering R_ corner rounding Function When the above instruction is added to the end of a block that specifies linear interpolation G01 or circular interpolation G02 G03 achamfering or corner rounding is automatically done in the machining Blocks specifying chamfering and corner rounding can be specified consecutively Explanation 1 Blocks specifying chamfering and corner rounding can only be inserted between the linear interpolation blocks The chamfering after L is used to specify the distance from the virtual co
65. ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 41 DISL ENG CHI COR COR 1 Displayer color setting black and white 0 Displayer color setting chromatic CHI 1 To set the actual language not for Chinese 261 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ENG DISL 0 To set the actual language for Chinese To set the actual language for English To set the actual language not for English To display company LOGO at start Not to display company LOGO at start Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 02 2 DAC DAL DRC DRL PPD MCN MCN 1 Machine position displayed by input unit 0 Machine position not displayed by input unit PPD 1 Relative position display reset when coordinate system is set 0 Relative position display not reset when coordinate system is set DRL 1 Add tool length compensation in relative position display 0 Not add tool length compensation in relative position display DRC 1 Add tool radius compensation in relative position display 0 Not add tool radius compensation in relative position display DAL 1 Add tool length compensation in absolute position display 0 Not add tool length compensation in absolute position display DAC 1 Add tool radius compensation in absolute position display 0 Not add tool radius compensation in absolute position display
66. information involving the file names bytes lines transferred and the transmission time and speed bytes s will be displayed which is shown as following 247 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual DEC Communication xi State File Name Sent Bytes Sent time foo 05 Sent Lines 955 Bytes Sec 3778 Please don t do other operations by this software except concluding the transmission Press key to cancel the operation after the processing completion 2 Transfer type for sending files 1 Open and set the serial port with a fixed baudrate 115200 the data bits stop bit and parity check are identical with that in DNC transmission and it can t be changed a sea File 2 Open the Send file item of transfer type menu or press the button in tool column the following dialogue block will pop up Send File Dialog xi File list File Path File Name Par State G 441 HC 000041 txt USER Not Only send the edited file 1 File Send Add File Cancel 3 Select Add file button the dialogue block Partition Selection will appear Select Part Dialog xi User Part C Sys Part 248 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The program files can only be sent to user part while the system configuration and backup files can only be sent to system partition or they won t be identifi
67. is to go to The third parameter word of the instruction parameter is a linear axis except the circular interpolation axis Its value is the helical height The significance and restriction for other instruction parameters are identical with circular interpolation If the circle can t be machined by the system specified instruction parameter the system will give error message And the system changes the current tool moving mode for G02 G03 Feedrate along the two circular interpolation axes are specified A moving axis that is not circular interpolation axis is added as for the instruction method mode and F instruction specifies the feedrate along an arc So the feedrate of this linear axis is as following Length of circular arc Length of linear axis F x The feedrate should be ensured that the linear axis feedrate are not beyond any limit 31 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Restriction Attention should be paid to the coordinate plane selection set when the helical interpolation is being done 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Format G90 G91 Function There are 2 instructions for axis moving the absolute instruction and the incremental instruction The absolute instruction is a method of programming by the axis moving end point coordinate which is concerned with coordinate system Refer to section 3 3 1 3 3 4 The incremental instruction is a method of programming by th
68. is used to control the the cooling pump If the miscellaneous functions are locked in auto mode this instruction is not executed 5 1 4 A axis release and clamping M10 M11 Instruction M10 M11 Itis used for A axis release and clamping 5 1 5 Tool release and clamping M16 M17 Instruction M16 M17 Itis used for tool release and clamping 5 1 6 Spindle orientation M19 Instruction M19 It is specified for spindle orientation which is used for tool change and positioning 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 Instruction M21 It is used to search tool in retraction M22 it is used to search a new tool for clamping 5 1 8 Magazine rotation instruction M23 M24 Instruction M23 It is used to rotate the tool magazine to the spindle M24 It is used to rotate the tool magazine back 5 1 9 Rigid tapping M29 Instruction M29 It is used for rigid tapping 5 1 10 Lubricating on and off M32 M33 Instruction M32 M33 It is used to control the lubricating pump If the miscellaneous functions are locked in auto mode this instruction is not executed 5 1 11 Helical chip remover on and off M35 M36 Instruction M35 M36 Itis used to control the helical chip remover 5 1 12 Mirror image instructions M40 M41 M42 M43 Instructions M40 M41 M42 M43 M40 is used to specify X axis mirror image M41 is used to specify Y axis mirror image M42 is used to specify Z axis mirror image M43 is used to cancel mirror image 5
69. left hand high speed and high precision tapping Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the 95 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Dwell time F_ Cutting feedrate Number of repeats G74 G98 G74 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop a Initial level perationi g aaa i Operation2 Spindle CW Spindle gt Spindle Ss pe sion PointR Point R level Point R Point R level Operation3 Operation5 Point Z Point Z P J Spindle v a Spindle eee N ae CCW After positioning along X and Y axis traverse is performed by Z axis to point R level The spindle is rotated CW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G74 instruction When tapping is finished the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction to retract to point R level and stops And traverse to initial level is then performed When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods 1 Specify M29 S before a t
70. level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to Reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 19 Right handed rigid tapping G84 Format G84 X_Y ZR PFK Function In rigid tapping the spindle is controlled by a servo motor that can perform the high speed and high precision tapping and it can ensure the tapping initial level without changing point R level l e If a tapping instruction is repeated for many times at the same position the thread shape will not be damaged 93 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Dwell time F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats G84 G98 G84 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop a Initial level Operation 7 JEE Operation2 hre spinde cow Spindle stop j W pindle Spindle CCW ea P stop hes P Point R Point R level Operat
71. linear 119 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual A block specified by G42 A Intersection 6 Programmed path 8 Instruction for cancelling the offset vector temporarily In offset mode if G92 absolute programming is specified the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and then the offset vector is restored automatically In this case different from the offset cancel mode the tool moves directly from the intersection to the specified point where the offset vector is cancelled Also when offset mode is restored the tool moves directly to the intersection Tool center path S Intersection g Intersection G41 N5 G91G01X3000Y 7000 N6 X 3000Y6000 N7 G92x1000 2000 N8 GO1X40007 8000 G92 block N7 9 A block without tool movement The following blocks have no tool movement In these blocks the tool will not move even if tool radius compensation is effective DMOS oo eeeee ee eee M code output 2VS27 p enpi akiken S code output 3 G04 X10000 nosice Dwell 4 G17 Z100 ou eee Move instruction not included in offset plane 5 G90 nassnsssssssnssesrereeens G code only 6 G01 G91 XO eee Move distance is zero a Specified at offset start If the tool movement is not made by the start up block it will be done by the next moving instruction block by the system 120 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G40 G91 sssseson
72. non modal instruction which is only effective in current line 2 Alarm occurs if parameter X P both appear 3 Only X or P can follow G04 instruction alarm occurs if other code follows it 4 Alarm occurs if X P value is set for negative 5 Exact stop is executed if neither X nor P is specified 4 2 6 Unidirectional positioning G60 Format G60 X_Y_Z_F_ Overrun Start position xX Start position Function For accurate positioning to eliminate machine backlash G60 can be used for accurate positioning in a direction at Temporary stop End position Explanation G60 is non modal code which is only effective in a specified block For parameter X Y Z they represent the end point coordinate in absolute programming and moving distance of tool in incremental programming When using unidirectional positioning in tool offset the path of unidirectional positioning is the tool compensation path The overrun marked in above figure can be set by system parameter P335 P336 P337 P338 P339 and the dwell time can be set by parameter P334 The positioning direction can be defined by the set positive or negative overrun refer to system parameter for details Example 1 G90 GOO X 10 Y10 33 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G60 X20 Y25 1 If the system parameter P334 1 P335 8 P336 5 as for statement 1 the tool path is AB dwell for 1s BC C 20 25 Q A 28 20 AC10
73. number and press key for location step 4 can be ignored 5 Input the new parameter values by numerical keys 6 Press key to enter and display the parameter value 7 After all parameters are set and entered set the parameter on off for OFF 3 4 Offset display modification and setting 3 4 1 Offset display Press key to enter offset page there are OFFSET PITCH1 PITCH2 PITCH3 PITCH4 PITCH5 sub modes in this page They can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys which is shown as following 1 Offset page Press OFFSET soft key to enter this page Fig 3 4 1 OFFSET 000002 N0120 NO GEOM H WEAR H GEOM D WEAR D 001 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 002 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 003 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 004 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 005 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 006 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 007 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 008 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 009 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 010 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 CT POS RELATIVE X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 7 0 0000 DATA 0000 T0100 MDI C OFFSET IE PITCH XJEPITCH YJ LPITCH Z PITCH 4 gt Fig 3 4 1 Press bP soft key to enter the 2 page of OFFSET 187 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual lt 4 PITCHS Press OFFSET soft key again to enter OFFSET operation page as is shown in Fig 3 4 2 OFFSET 000002 N0120 NO GEOM H WEAR
74. perform the linear motion from the old vector of the start point to the end point in GOO G01 mode It performs linear movement from the old vector of start point to the end point In GOO mode the axes rapidly traverse to the end point By using this instruction the system enters into tool radius compensation cancel mode from tool radius compensation mode If G40 is specified without X__ Y__ no operation is performed by the tool Tool radius compensation left G41 1 In G00 G01 mode G41 X__Y__D __ It specifies a new vector being vertical to the direction of X Y at the block end point The tool is moved from the tip of the old vector to the tip of the new one at the start point Xt Y ZAA New vector Tool center path Start point Old vector Programmed path When the old vector is zero by this instuction the tool is switched to tool radius compensation mode from tool offset cancel mode And the offset value is specified by D code 2 In G02 G03 mode 105 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G02 G03 X__Y_R_ the end point can be made out From the arc advancing direction it points to the left right The By program above the new vector that is located on the line between the circle center and tool center moves along an arc from the old vector tip to the new vector tip with the precondition that the old vector is has been made out The offset vector points to or is apart from the circl
75. point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level 91 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 G86 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 18 Boring cycle G89 Format G89 X_Y_Z R_P_F_K_ Function Itis used to bore a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R ge Dwell time F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats G89 G98 G89 G99 TE o level Z Point R Point R Point R level Point Z This cycle is almost the same as G85 The difference is that this cycle perfoms a dwell at the hole bottom Before specifying G89 use a miscell
76. point Y offset 0 0000 DATA s0000 T0100 EDIT BITPAR CNUMPARI I MACRO1 MACRO2 Fig 3 3 2 See details about this parameter in Appendix 1 185 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 Macro variable 1 page Press MACRO 1 soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 3 COMMON VARIABLES 000002 N0120 NO DATA DATA 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 ALWAYS NULL S0000 T0100 DATA EDIT BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO MACRO2 Fig 3 3 3 4 Macro variable 2 page Press MACRO 2 soft key to enter this page see Fig 3 3 4 SYSTEM VARIABLES 000002 N0120 NO DATA DATA 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 INPUT INTERFACE SIGNAL NO S0000 T0100 EDIT BITPAR NUMPAR MACRO1 MACRO2 Fig 3 3 4 ooooocooo jo S OS ODO OS OS OS OS Or OO O OO 3 3 2 Modification and setting of the parameter values 1 Select MDI mode 2 Enter lt SET gt mode input the corresponding password in the 2 page PSW mode of the SET and lt RETURN gt to ON OFF mode to set the parameter on off for ON 186 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 Press key to enter the parameter page 4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be changed Method 1 Press page keys to display the parameter to be set then move the cursor to the place to be modified Method 2 Press SEARCH key input parameter
77. position G91 Two axes of X Y Z Coordinate of end point axis relative to start point Distance from start point Two axes of I J K Coordinate of circle center to circle center axis relative to start point Arc radius Arc radius Feedrate Arc tangential speed CW and CCW mean the directions viewed from the positive Z or Y Z axis to the negative in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system regarding to XY or ZX YZ plane as shown in Fig 4 2 3 1 27 CGiSR I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Z G03 G03 Pe G17 G19 CVV and CCV Fig 4 2 3 1 The default plane mode at power on can be set by bit parameters NO 31 1 2 3 The arc end point can be specified by parameter words X Y Z It is an absolute value in G90 an incremental value that is a coordinate of the end point relative to the start point in G91 The circle center is specified by parameter words I J K corresponding to X Y Z respectively Either in absolute mode G90 or in incremental mode G91 parameter values of I J K are coordinates of circle center relative to the arc start point for simplicity the circle center coordinate when taking the start point as origin They are incremental values with signs See Fig 4 2 3 2 End point x y End point Z x End point y Z N Center Center Center Fig 4 2 3 2 J K are assigned with sign according to the circle center relative to the start point
78. repressing PROGRAM key in program page PAR 1 To switchover page by repressing PARAMETER key in parameter page 0 Not switchover page by repressing PARAMETER key in parameter page OFT 1 To switchover page by repressing OFFSET key in offset page 0 Not switchover page by repressing OFFSET key in offset page SET 1 To switchover page by repressing SET key in set page 0 Not switchover page by repressing SET key in set page GRA 1 To switchover page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page 0 Not switchover page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page DGN 1 To switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page 0 Not switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page ALM 1 To switchover page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page 0 Not switchover page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page Standard setting 1111 1111 System parameter number 02 6 INDX PMC PETP PETP 1 To switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key 0 Notto switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key 263 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PMC 1 To switchover page by repressing PMC key in PMC page 0 Not switchover page by repressing PMC key in PMC page INDX 1 To switchover page by repressing INDEX key in index page 0 Not switchover page by repressing INDEX key in index page Standard setting 1100 0001 System parameter number
79. to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling G34 CW rectangular groove rough milling I Rectangular groove width in X axis J Rectangular groove width in Y axis L Cutting width increment within a specified plane which should be less than the tool diameter and over 0 W Initial cut depth in Z axis which is a downward distance from R level and is over 0 if the initial cut exceeds the groove bottom it will cut at the bottom position Q Cut depth of each cutting feed V Distance to the end surface to be machined in rapid feed which is over O U Corner radius no corner transition if omitted D Tool diameter number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions Cycle process Q Rapid to a location within XY plane 69 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 Rapid down to R level 3 To cut a W depth downward by a federate 4 To mill a rectangular surface helically from center outward by L increment each time 5 Z axis rapids to R level 6 X Y axes rapidly locates to the rectangle center 7 Zaxis rapids down to a position that has a V distance to the end surface 8 Zaxis cuts downward fora Q V depth 9 Repeat the actions of 4 8 till the rectangular surface with the total depth is machined 0 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 ins
80. to enter current next interface It displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the blocks to be executed See Fig 3 2 5 183 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PROGRAM NEXT MODAL 000002 N0120 CCURRENT CNEXT TSCM DO UNan Y ANKAK Ber DO VANGSHD ANKK S0000 T0100 MDI C PRGY MDI CUR MOD CUR NXTIIDIR Fig 3 2 5 5 Program DIR display Press DIR soft key to enter directory interface it displays Fig 3 2 6 a SYS VERSION hardware and software b PRG USED The programs saved including subprogram FREE number of the programs that can be saved c MEM USED the capacity occupied by the programs saved expressed by characters FREE the capacity available for program storage d PROGRAM DIR number of the program saved displayed by sequence Press key the program display changes by the name sequence and time sequence PROGRAM DIR 000002 N0120 SYS VERSION 1 1 HARD 0 03__ 07 02 05 SOFT PRG USED 16 FREE 184 MEM USED 832 K FREE 7328 K PROGRAM DIR 000001 61 2006 11 12 14 25 000028 252 2006 11 12 14 25 000041 2588 2006 11 12 14 25 000151 14261 2006 11 12 14 25 000084 299 2006 11 12 14 25 000073 259 2006 11 12 14 25 000083 9 2006 11 12 14 25 000099 12 2006 11 12 14 25 S0000 T0100 PRG MDIJ CUR MOD CUR NXT TDIR Fig 3 2 6 Explanation The program numbers in memory can be displayed by the page keys 184
81. to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Dwell time F Cutting feedrate G88 G98 G88 G99 Spindle CCW 2 Fg pinitial level Say i Spindle CCW Point R Point R level Point Z Point Z spindle stop spindle stop after dwell after dwell After positioning along X and Y axis the tool rapidly traverses to point R level Boring is performed from point R level to point Z When boring is completed a dwell is performed then the spindle is stopped The tool is manually retracted from the hole bottom point Z to point R level in G99 or the initial level in G98 and the spindle is rotated CCW Before specifying G88 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G88 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to
82. will position to the location specified 2 G53 is a non modal instruction which is effective in block containing it and it doesn t affect the coordinate system defined before Restriction Machine coordinate system selection G53 When the position in the machine coordinate system is specified the tool rapidly traverse to this position The G53 used for selecting machine coordinate system is a non modal G code which is only effective for the block specifying the machine coordinate system Absolute G90 should be specified for G53 if G53 is specified in incremental mode G91 G91 is neglected G53 is still in G90 mode without changing G91 mode The tool can be specified to move to a special position e g in G53 can be used in program to position the tool to the tool changing point After power on Machine coordinate system must be set before G53 is specified after power on Therefore manual reference point return must be performed after power on zero return in 38 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual manual mode or auto reference point return must be specified by G28 If an absolute position encoder is used this operation is unneeded 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 Format G92 X_Y_Z_ Function It is used to set floating workpiece coordinate system The current tool absolute coordinate values in the new workpiece coordinate system are specified by 3 instruction parameters And this instructi
83. 0 EIA 1 ISO IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH 1 0 CHAN 0 3 CHANNEL NO ABS PRG CO ABS 1 INC AUTO SEQ 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ STOP 0000 PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP 0000 SEQUENCE NO 2006 Y 11 M 14 D 14 H 26 M 45 S DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 JK PANEL ISERVO gt Fig 10 1 1 Therefore the sequence number will be automatically inserted into the blocks during editing The incremental amount of the sequence number is set by number parameter No 0210 10 1 1 2 Program input 1 Press key to enter Edit mode 2 Press key to enter program page See Fig 10 1 2 PROGRAM 000002 N0180 000003 0060 X100 0120 X0 0240 G41 X100 D1 0300 G01 Y100 0360 G02 X200 R50 0420 G01 YO F2500 0180 XO 0180 Y50 DATA Ln 3 S0000 T0100 EDIT OPRI MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 2 235 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 0 0 3 Press address key then key in numerical keys 0 2 by sequence an example by setting up a program named O00002 it displays 000002 behind the data column See Fig 10 1 3 PROGRAM 000002 N0180 000003 0060 X100 0120 X0 0240 G41 X100 D1 0300 G01 Y100 0360 G02 X200 R50 0420 G01 YO F2500 0180 X0 0180 Y50 DATA 00002 Ln 3 S0000 T0100 EDIT MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 3 4 Press key to set up the new program name it displays Fig 10 1 4 PROGRAM 000002 N0180 000002
84. 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 71 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 6 To make linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 7 To make circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G35 G36 Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G35 instruction 53 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G35 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 F800 Canned cycle starts and go down to the bottom to perform the rectangular groove fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 6 Rectangle outside fine milling cycle G35 G36 Format G37 G98 G99 X YZ RL JL UD F_ K G38 72 CGSR I HISU GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Function They are used for fine milling outside a rectangle by the width and direction specified and the tool returns after fine milling Explanation G37 CCW rectangle out
85. 0 7 The offset value of the offset number can be saved into the offset memory in advance by LCD MDI panel For the tool radius compensation the effectiveness of the offset value by D code respecified or in next block is set by bit parameter No 39 4 The range of the offset value is as follows mo Offset value D 999 999 999 999 m m Note The default offset value of DOO is 0 that can t be set or modified by user 3 Plane selection and vector Compensation calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17 G18 G19 This plane is called the compensation plane For example if XY plane is selected the compensation and vector calculation are carried out by X Y in program The coordinates of the axis not in compensation plane are not affected by compensation In simultaneous 3 axes control only the tool path projected on the compensation plane is compensated The change of the compensation plane can only be performed after the compensation is 104 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual cancelled 4 G40 G41 and G42 The cancellation and execution of the tool radius compensation vector are specified by G40 G41 G42 They are used to define a mode to determine the value and the direction of the offset vector by combination with G00 G01 G02 G03 Tool radius compensation cancel Tool radius compensation right Tool radius compensation cancel G40 Use the following instruction to
86. 001 0 Scaling override unit 0 0001 XSC 1 Axes scaling override by I J K 0 Axes scaling override by P instruction Standard setting 0111 1001 System parameter number 0 4 8 PD1 MDL MDL 1 Gcodes of unidirectional positioning set for modal 0 G codes of unidirectional positioning not set for modal PD1 1 To perform in position check for unidirectional positioning 0 Not perform in position check for unidirectional positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 0 IDX sim G90 INC ABS REL DOP 271 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual DOP 1 Use calculator for indexing table decimal point input 0 Not use calculator for indexing table decimal point input REL 1 Relative position display setting of indexing table within 360 0 Relative position display setting of indexing table beyond 360 ABS 1 Use 360 rotation for indexing table absolute coordinate 0 Not use 360 rotation for indexing table absolute coordinate INC 1 Select the latest rotation direction 0 Not select the latest rotation direction G90 1 Indexing instruction absolute instruction 0 Indexing instruction specified by G90 G91 SIM 1 Make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in same block 0 Do not make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in same block IDX 1 B typ
87. 021 022 023 Fig 3 7 1 oooooocqcoooo ao 000002 N00120 DATA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ooooonooooo DG O O G O O O O O ao T O O O GO OOT O O A pi oO T0100 EDIT EN CI PLC NC MT PLC MTY WAVE DGO GT OU OGG O OT O O ao This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system See GSK218M CNC System PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 2 PLC gt NC interface PLC gt NC interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 2 DIAGNOSE PLC NC DATA NO 000 NO DO OCT O O GD OLOO O DO OT O OG OTOLO O hkm H ooooonooooo 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 NO 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T O O O O O GO O QO O co O HEO O OU GO O OQO QO QO ao OG 000002 N00120 DATA eerrrseseserrreere oS OO O o o So Co So S S 0 JOO OUOU OG QOG OG OG O HS N C PLC NC MT PLC MT WAVE 199 Fig 3 7 2 O OOU G G O OO GOG co 5 oO T O O O O O O O O H jH Fr DO OO OGOOGO O Connection and In lt DIAGNOSE gt page press PLC gt NC soft key to enter CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual This is the signal sent to CNC sy
88. 0217 PSK CPD NE9 OSR NE8 NE8 1 Editting of subprogram with the number 80000 89999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with the number 80000 89999 allowed OSR 1 O search available for program search 0 O search not available for program search NE9 1 Editting of Subprogram with the number 90000 99999 unallowed 0 Editting of Subprogram with the number 90000 99999 allowed CPD 1 ENTER key needed when deleting programs 0 ENTER key unneeded when deleting programs PSK 1 Search for programs protected effective 0 Search for programs protected ineffective Standard setting 0001 0001 System parameter number 0 2 8 MCL MEP MKP 1 To clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode 0 Not clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode MCL 1 To delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode 0 Not delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 29 MoN wz wzo mcv Gor woF WOF 1 Tool wear offset input by MDI disabled 0 Tool wear offset input by MDI enabled GOF 1 Geometric tool offset input by MDI disabled 0 Geometric tool offset input by MDI enabled MCV 1 Macro variables input by MDI disabled 264 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operat
89. 1 G21 G69 D 0001 G21 G69 D 0001 G40 G64 N 20 G40 G64 N 2 DISTANCE ABSOLUTE REM DIST 1 X 54 000 X 54 000 X 0 000 2 Y 12 000 Y 7 800 Y 4 200 3 Z 29 500 Z 29 500 Z 0 000 S00000 T0003 AUTO RSTR RETURN Fig 10 1 9 4 In MDI mode input modes according to the pre loaded modal values in Fig 10 1 9 5 Press the key the control returns to the interruption point by GOO and go on execute the program This execution can be restarted at any place Note 1 The 1 2 3 headed the coordinates in figure is the moving sequence for the axes moving to the program restarting position They are set by parameter P376 Note 2 Check whether the collision occurs when the tool moves to the program restart position if this possibility exists move the tool to the place that has no obstructions and restart Note 3 When the coordinate axis restart the position moving switch on the single block running the tool stops each time it finishes an axis movement Note 4 If there is no absolute position detector it must restart the line reference point return of advancing after the power is on Note 5 Don t perform the resetting during the program execution from block research at restarting to restarting or the restarting must be done from the first step 243 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 10 2 Program management 10 2 1 Program directory search Press key then press DIR soft key to enter t
90. 1 9160X500 Y500H01 N3 Z 250 p N5 G01Z S0F 1 NG Y100F2 N1 G91G00x5N0Y500H01 N6 Offset mode N3 601Z 300F1 N6 Y100F2 NG is entered into buffer when N3 Move instruction in Z axis N3 is being executed The relation between them is the offset as shown in figure N1 Offset start 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 Format G39 or JL G39 _K_ J_K_ Function By specifying G39 in offset mode during tool radius compensation corner offset circular interpolation can be specified The radius of the corner offset equals the offset value And the effectiveness of the corner arc in radius compensation is set by bit parameter No 41 6 Explanation 126 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 When the instruction above is specified corner circular interpolation in which the radius equals offset value can be performed 2 G41 or G42 preceding this instruction determines whether the arc is CW or CCW G39 is a non modal G code 3 When G39 without I J K is programmed the arc at the corner is formed so that the vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of the next block It is shown as follows X axis In offset mode N1 Y10 0 N2 G39 xi N3 X 10 0 oe Block N1 Offset vector x Block N2 Lae Block N3 Programmed path Tool center path a Fig 4 5 4 1 G39 without I J K 4 When G39 is specified with I J K t
91. 1 N00000 NO MEANING 0000 Power not off after parameter input 0001 File open fail 0002 Data input overflow 0003 Program number exists 0004 Digit or character input without address Modify program 0005 Address with no data but another address or EOB Code modify program 0006 Character input wrongly for address or 2 or more input Modify program 0007 wrongly input for address 2 or more input Modify program No Ln 1 381 S0000 T0000 EDIT G CODEJ PARA MACRO p Fig 3 10 2 In this interface alarms meaning and operations are shown 3 G code interface In lt INDEX gt page press G CODE softkey to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 3 INDEX INFO G CODE 000001 N00000 G11 G20 G31 G49 G56 G61 G73 G83 G89 G96 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G21 G27 G28 G29 G30 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G50 G51 G53 G54 G55 G57 G58 G59 G60 G62 G63 G64 G65 G68 G69 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G97 G98 G99 S0000 T0000 Rapid positioning G00 EDIT COPRT ALARM KG CODE PARA MACRO p Fig 3 10 3 The meanings of G codes used in system are shown in G code interface they can be viewed 207 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual by cursor selection And the G codes definitions are shown in the down left of the interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 3 If you want to know the format and usage of a
92. 10 Dwell for 1s System parameter Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in X axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in Y axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in Z axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in 4th axis unit mm Overrun and unidirectional positioning direction in 5th axis unit mm Dwell time of unidirectional positioning Cunit mm 4 2 7 System parameter online modification G10 Function It is used to set or modify the values of pitch error compensation radius length offset external zero offset workpiece zero offset additional workpiece zero offset number parameter bit parameter and so on in program Format G10 L50NP R Set or modify bit parameter G10L51N_R_ Set or modify number parameter G11 Parameter input mode cancel Parameter definition N Parameter number Sequence number to be modified P Parameter bit number Bit number to be modified 34 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual R Value Parameter value after it modified The values can also be modified by following instructions refer to relative sections for details Gi0L2 P_XY2ZAB _ Setor modify external zero offset or workpiece zero offset G10 L10 P_R_ Set or modify length offset G10 L11 P_R_ Set or modify length wear G10 L12 P_ R Set or modify radius offset G10 L13 P_R_ Set or modi
93. 1100 1147 write signal output to PLC by bits 3 Tool length offset value 1500 1755 readable and writable 4 Tool length wear offset value 1800 2055 readable and writable 5 Tool radius offset value 2100 2355 readable and writable 6 Tool radius wear offset value 2400 2655 readable and writable 7 Tool magazine data list 2700 2955 read only unwritable 8 Alarm 3000 9 User data list 3500 3755 read only unwritable 10 Modal message 4000 4030 read only unwritable 11 Position message 5001 5030 read only unwritable 12 Workpiece zero offset 5201 5235 readable and writable 134 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 13 Additional workpiece coordinate system 7001 7250 readable and writable 3 Explanation for system variables 1 Modal message Variable Function No 4000 G10 G11 4001 G00 G01 G02 G03 4002 G17 G18 G19 4003 G90 G91 4004 G94 G95 4005 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 4006 G20 G21 4007 G40 G41 G42 4008 G43 G44 G49 4009 G73 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 4010 G98 G99 4011 G15 G16 4012 G50 G51 4013 G68 G69 4014 G61 G62 G63 G64 4015 G96 G97 4016 To be expanded 4017 To be expanded 4018 To be expanded 4019 To be expanded 4020 To be expanded 4021 To be expanded 4022 D 4023 H 4024 F 4025 M 4026 S T N O P
94. 2 3 The feedrate is overridden from point a to b Fig 4 6 2 3 Arc to arc 5 Regarding a program from straight line to arc or from arc to straight line the feedrate is overriden from point a to point b and from point c to point d Fig 4 6 2 4 Programmed path 2 Tool center path Tool Fig 4 6 2 4 Straight line to arc arc to staight line Restriction 1 Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration deceleration before interpolation 2 Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by a start up 131 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual block or followed by a block including G41 or G42 3 Override for inner corner is not performed if the offset is zero 4 7 Macro G code 4 7 1 Custom macro The function by a group of instructions can be saved into memory like a subprogram in advance and the functions are represented by an instruction If the instruction is written out in the program these functions can be used This group of instructions is called custom macro body and the instruction represented is called custom macro instruction The custom macro body is also abreviated for macro The custom macro instruction is also called macro calling instruction Custom macro body Main program A group of instructipns Cu for a special functidn stam macro command Variables can be used in custom macro body and they can be operated and assigned by ma
95. 201 V 202 2037 16 Sine 1 JeSIN K Unit o degree G65 H31 P I Q J R K Example G65 H31 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 SIN 203 17 Cosine JeCOS K Unit o degree G65 H32 P I Q J R k Example G65 H32 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 COS 203 18 Tangent JeTAM K Unit o degree G65 H33 P I Q J R K Example G65 H33 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 TAM 203 19 Arctangent ATAN J K Unit o degree G65 H34 P I Q J R k Example G65 H34 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 ATAN 202 203 142 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note1 Theunitof P S are 1 degree Note 2 If Q R required are not specified in operations above they are defaulted for zero Note 3 TRUNC rounding operation the decimal portion is abandoned 3 Transfer command 1 Unconditional transfer G65 H80 Pn n Sequence number Example G65 H80 P120 To N120 block 2 Conditional transfer1 J EQ K G65 H81 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H81 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 3 Conditional transfer2 J NE K G65 H82 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H82 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 4 Conditional transfer 3 J GT K gt G65 H83 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G6
96. 2100 subprogram call M98 P2200L7 calling for 7 times G40 G50 GO G90 Z20 XO0YO M30 Subprogram 2200 02200 G68 X0 YO G91 R45 0 relative rotation angle G90 M98 P2100 subprogram 02200 calling subprogram 02100 M99 Subprogram 02100 02100 G90 GO X0 Y 20 Right hand tool compensation setup G01Z 2 F200 X8 284 X14 142 Y 14 142 M99 50 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual h Programmed path When offset is applied eh a A J X14 142 14 142 N 8 284 ri ii i siz A Subprogram 4 2 16 Skip function G31 Format G31 XYZ Function The linear interpolation can be specified like G01 after G31 instruction During the execution of G31 the current instruction execution will be interrupted to execute next block if an external skip signal is entered While the working end point is specified not by programming but by signals from machine this function can be used e g used for grinding It can also be used for measuring the workpiece dimensions Explanation 1 G31 is a non modal G code that is only effective in a specified block 2 Alarm occurs if G31 is given during the tool radius compensation The tool radius compensation should be cancelled before G31 instruction Example The block after G31 is a single axis moving specified by incremental values as Fig 4 2 16 1 shows G31 G91X100 0 F100 Y50 0 R Skip signal is input here 50 0 Actual motion
97. 4 system 2 G55 system 3 G56 system 4 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 no Workpiece Workpiece coordinate coordinate system 6 G59 Machine system offset zero aoe ad m 7 Machine reference point J Machine coordinate origin Fig 4 2 8 1 36 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual As shown in Fig 4 2 8 1 after power on the machine returns to machine zero by manual zero return The machine coordinate system is set up by machine zero with the machine reference point generating and workpiece coordinate system to be defined The corresponding values of offset number parameter P10 14 in workpiece coordinate system are the integral offset of the 6 workpiece coordinate system The 6 workpiece coordinate system origins can be specified by coordinate offset input in MDI mode or set by number parameter P15 44 These 6 workpiece coordinate systems are set up by the distances from machine zero to each coordinate system origin Xx Workpiece zero offset 4 Machine zero Example N10 G55 G90 G00 X100 Y20 N20 G56 X80 5 225 5 For the example above when N10 block is being executing it rapidly traverses to a position X 100 Y 20 in G55 workpiece coordinate system When N20 block is being executing the absolute coordinate value automatically turns to the coordinate value X 80 5 Z 25 5 in G55 workpiece coordinate system for rapid positioning
98. 4 G01 X20 N5 G28 Y60 Intermediate point X40 Y60 which is substituted by X40 specified by G28 before due to it is not specified in X axis Note The intermediate point is not 20 60 N6 G55 Due to workpiece coordinate system change the intermediate point 40 60 in G54 workpiece coordinate system is changed for 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system N7 G29 X60 Y20 Return to the point 60 20 via the intermediate point 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system from reference point The G28 instruction can automatically cancel the tool compensation and this instruction is 56 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual only used in automatic tool change mode changing tool at the reference point after reference point return So the tool radius compensation and tool length compensation should be cancelled before using this instruction See the 1 reference point setting in number parameter P45 P49 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 There are 4 reference points in machine coordinate system In a system without an absolute position detector the ond at AM reference point return functions can be used only after the auto reference point return G28 or manual reference point return is performed Format G30P2X_Y_Z_ _ the 2 reference point return P2 can be omitted G30 P3X_Y_Z the 3 reference point return G30 P4X_Y_Z the 4 reference point return Function It is used for the operation of returni
99. 48 5 1 13 Spindle blowing on and off M44 M45 ou ccececceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeneees 148 5 1 14 Auto tool change start and end M50 M51 oo cccecccsseceeeeeeeeessenseaeeees 149 5 1 15 Tool judging after tool change M53 ooo cee ceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeneaeeess 149 5 2 M codes Used DY PrOQraM cicivivsisssesceeeestssveecsurnecesseeeetetuesreeeners asinna iini 149 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 MO2 ou cccecccccccccceccescesssseeseeeeeeecessensnaneess 149 5 2 2 Program dwell MOO cicciscsosscacissanseceeecnsccsheebevevecnteceane stevens sonscuena eecnasbacoihensee 149 5 2 3 Program optional Stop M01 ou eceeeceeeccceceeeeeeceeeeneeceeeeeeeseeeeneaeeeeeeeeeseeenseeees 149 5 2 4 Subprogram calling M98 o oo ccecceeecsecseeeceeeeeeceeceneeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeseeeeeeeseesenseeeees 149 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 ceecceccecceceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeencneeeeeeeeeeeeensnseaeees 150 6 S codes for Spindle FUNCTION u1 ssscecccccsceneccuccsneceseseensessseenensssesnensssuessneessessensesensenseeaesseenees 151 6 1 Spindle analog CONtrOL cccccceceeeecee cece cece eeeecee aces eeeeeeeeseneaaeeseeeeeseseeeeiaeeeeeeeesseees 151 6 2 Spindle switch volume control ccccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaeeceeeeeeeceeceneeeeeeeeeeseeneas 151 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeeneeees 152 7 Feed FUNCTIONS F COCC secc
100. 5 H83 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 gt 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 lt 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 5 Conditional transfer 4 J LTH K lt G65 H84 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H84 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 lt 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 2 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 6 Conditional transfer5 J GE K 2 G65 H85 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H85 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 s 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 lt 202 the execution proceeds by sequence 7 Conditional transfer6 J LE K s G65 H86 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number Example G65 H86 P1000 Q 201 R 202 When 201 s 202 it goes to N1000 block when 201 gt 202 the execution 143 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual proceeds by sequence Note The sequence number can be specified by variables Such as G65 H81 P 200 Q 201 R 202 if the conditions are met it goes to the block whose number is specified by 200 4 Logic AND logic OR and logic NOT instructions Example G65 H01 P 100 QO G65 H01 P 101 Q3 G65 H01 P 102 Q5 G65 H11 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 3 for 011 and the operation result is 100 7 G65 H12 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 3 for 011 and the operation result is 100 1 4 7 5 Examples for custom macro 1 Bolt hole cycle To drill N equal spaced holes on the circumferenc
101. 50 2 2020 NOO60 lt N1060 M99 Subprogram call from subprogram are identical with that from main program Note Alarm PS 078 occurs if subprogram number specified by address P is not found CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 2 3 Program end The program begins with program name ends with M02 M30 or M99 see Fig 2 2 For the end code M02 M30 or M99 detected in program execution if M02 M30 specifies the end the program finishes and reset if M99 specifies the end the control returns to the program beginning to restart the program if M99 is at the end of the subprogram the control returns to the program that calls the subprogram M30 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 for returning to the program beginning and M02 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 4 for returning to the program beginning CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 Programming Fundamentals 3 1 Controlled axis Table 3 1 Item 218M Basic controlled axes 3 axes X Y Z Extended controlled axes total 5 axes 3 2 Axis name The 3 primary axis names are always X Y or Z And the controlled axes are set by number parameter No 5 The additional axis names are set by number parameter No 6 accordingly such as A B C 3 3 Coordinate system 3 3 1 Machine coordinate system A special point on machine used as machine benchmark is called machine zero which is set by the machine builde
102. 7 instruction is the position obtained by adding the offset Therefore if the position with the offset added is not the reference point the indicator does not light up and an alarm is issued Usually the tool offset should be cancelled before G27 instruction 4 4 Canned cycle G code Canned cycle make it easier for the programmer to creat programs With a canned cycle a machining operation by multiple blocks can be realized by a single block which contains G function In this system only canned cycle in G17 plane is available The general process of canned cycle 58 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Acanned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations as Fig 4 4 1 shows Operation 1 i eset owt oes gt O g Initial level 1 Operation 2 Operation 6 1 Point R level lt Operation 5 Operation3 1 ye gt Rapid traverse Operation 4 gt Feed Fig 4 4 1 Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y may including another axis Operation 2 Traverse to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 Traverse to the initial point The hole machining can be performed in Z axis if positioned in XY plane It defines that a canned cycle operation is determined by 3 types They are all specified by G code 1 Data type G90 absolute mode G91 increm
103. CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 8 This user manual describes all proceedings concerning the operations of this CNC system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable system operations due to the manual text limit product specific applications and other causes Therefore the proceedings not indicated herein should be considered impractical or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Company profile GSK GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd is the largest production and marketing enterprise of the CNC system in China currently It is the Numerical Control industrial base of South China and the undertaking enterprise of the 863 national main project Industrialization Support Technology for Medium Numerical Control System as well as one of the 20 basic equipment manufacture enterprises in Guangdong province It has been taking up the research and development design and the manufacture of machine CNC system CNC device drive unit and servo motor in recent 10 years Now it has developed into a large high t
104. CNC System Connection and PLC manual for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 5 WAVE interface In lt DIAGNOSE gt page press WAVE soft key to enter WAVE interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 5 200 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual DIAGNOSE WAVE 000002 N0120 AXIS 0 O ALL 1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 A 5 B WAVE TYPE 2 0 Speed 1 Acc 2 Acc Acc HOR SCALE 5 VER SCALE 100 S0000 T0010 DATA MDI IN C1 PLC NC MT 1 PLC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 5 AXIS select the axis name for WAVE WAVE TYPE select the WAVE type HOR VER SCALE select the WAVE ratio Data in MDI mode move the cursor to select the data to be modified and press key for confirmation 3 7 2 Signal viewing 1 Press key to select the DIAGNOSE page 2 The respective address explanation and meaning are shown at the down left of the screen when moving the cursor to the left or right 3 Move the cursor or key in the parameter address to be searched then press key the target address will be found 4 In WAVE interface the feedrate acceleration acceleration of acceleration of each axis can be displayed It is easy to debug the system and find the optimum suited parameters for the drive and the motor 3 8 Alarm display When an alarm is issued ALARM is displayed at the bottom line of the LCD Press the key to display the alarm page there are 4 modes ALARM USER HISTORY 201 CGSB
105. DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 4 5 Input the blocks programmed word by word then press interface switching key e g J page or the mode switchover key the program will be saved automatically and the program input is finished 236 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note 1 In Edit mode only the complete word can be entered Single letter and numerical number input is not supported by system Note 2 If word error is found in program inputting it can be cancelled by pressing key to delete one by one or pressing key to delete the whole word 10 1 1 3 Search of sequence number word and line number Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in a program so that the execution and edit can be started from the block containing this sequence number Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates M S T and G codes does not affect the CNC coordinates and modal values If the execution needs to be done from a searched block in a program specify M S T and G codes coordinates and so forth as required by MDI after closely checking the machine and CNC states at that point The word search function is used to search a special address word or number in a program and it is usually used for editing Steps for sequence number line number or word search
106. DIR page in program interface then select the program name to be deleted by moving cursor and press key the program selected will be deleted 10 1 3 Deletion of all programs The steps for deleting all programs in the memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page 0 c Key in the address key 9 99 99 d Key in the address keys by sequence 240 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual e Press key all the programs in the memory will be deleted 10 1 4 Copy of a program Steps for copying current program and saved for a new name a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page in DIR page select the program to be copied by cursor keys then press key to enter the program page c Press address key and key in the new program number d Press the key the file will be copied and the control enters the new program edit page e Returnto DIR page the name of the new program copied can be viewed The copy of the program can also be done in the program edit page 1 Press address key and key in the new program number 2 Press the COPY soft key the file will be copied and the control enters the new program edit page 3 Returnto DIR page the name of the new program copied can be viewed 10 1 5 Copy and paste of blocks The steps for program copy and paste are as following a Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied b Key
107. Do the hole machining by G89 according to the data Z specified in R P in and F in Cancel the hole machining mode and data A Absolute instruction and incremental instruction in canned cycle G90 G91 The change of G90 G91 along drilling axis is shown as Fig 4 4 2 Usually it is programmed by G90 if it is programmed by G91 Z and R are regarded as negative values 61 CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G90 Absolute instruction G91 Incremental instruction Point R level Point R level Point Z level Point Z level A B Fig 4 4 2 B Return to initial level in canned cycle G98 G99 After the tool reaches the bottom of a hole it may return to the point R level or the initial level These operations can be specified by G98 and G99 Generally G99 is used for the 1 drilling operation and G98 is used for the last drilling operation The initial level does not change even drilling is performed in G99 mode The following figure illustrates the operation of G98 and G99 G98 is the system default mode G98 Return to initial level G99 Return to point R level Initial level Initial level a A O Point R level Fig 4 4 3 The following symbols are used for the canned cycle illustration 62 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Positioning rapid traverse GOO Cutting feed linear interpolation
108. EEKE ENE 15 3 2 AXS NAME aan en a ia aaa a a a an aa Sada aioa o a a saadaa eaaa 15 3 3 Coordinate SYSLOMM wii sisiescestecectsneseensseecysseindannecneeecastanetangescedvesbaatedenseadseessieennae samen a 15 3 3 1 Machine coordinate SyStem cccccccceceeceee cece eee aeee sees aaee ease sees aeeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaes 15 3 3 2 Referen e DOIN ssir eiie iu dendhaahuvengentd dacs E EEEE EET Eaa EKETE 15 3 3 3 Workpiece coordinate SYStOM ccccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeness 16 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming sssssssseseseesereerrrrrrrerrrrrrrerrree 17 34 Mode a d mom mode see cecccccececeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeeeeteneeeneeeneeeneees 19 3 5 Decimal point programming c ccc teeter terete rete eeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 20 4 Preparatory FUNCTION G COCC 1 ccseecccccsneneccenennncenessensessseensnsasesnensesesnaneesseasenecsessensessseanenenss 21 4 1 Classification Of Gi Code sii csstcccneiteGrcvicneni sre welssiede Geis EE ERETTA 21 4 2 SIMPlE GS COS siriene ane aa E EEEE EEEE EEE aaa EKRENE aE 24 4 2 1 Rapid positioning GOO sssssssnsesseseserrrreetsrrtrtrrtartrttttttn rnnt tett rttr tnne terr netr Ennn nnee eneee 24 4 2 2 Linear interpolation GO1 ccccecccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseseceneseeeeeeeeseeseaeaees 25 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation GO2 GO3 ce
109. ELAY RO R511 A SEL DISP MSG A0 A31 DATA MDI PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCDGN PLCTRA Fig 3 9 1 PLCGRA Ln 000 429 RUN X001 0 G020 0 G020 4 G020 5 G020 6 DATA MEA Emergency switch MDI INFO PLCPAR PLCDGN PLCTRA Fig 3 9 2 204 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PLCPara RUN ADDR N7 N6 N5 N4 N3 N2 N1 NO K000 0 K001 K002 K003 K004 K005 K006 K007 K008 K009 K010 K011 DATA oooocooocoococo o oooocorcocoocooco oooocorococjceoooqoo oooocococorcoocoo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oooococococo o oooococococo o D G O O G D O DO O D MDI K INFO PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCDGN K PLCTRAY Fig 3 9 3 PLCDGN RUN ADDR N 7 N 6 N 5 N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 N O F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 F005 F006 F007 F008 F009 F010 F011 No G OGOGOGOOGOGO GOO OC c oooocoocococococo COC Ee ooooocooooqooo o O BE pae SE ae E a E ae E ee E a E e E a E E O gE OOo o0oo0ooonooOo oO O e EE cooocoocoooccoco Oo oR cooocoocooooo qoc oe cooocooocoocooo O BS MDI KINFO PLCGRAY PLCPAR KPECDGNI PLCTRA Fig 3 9 4 205 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PLCTRACE RUN ADDR _ _0000 0016 G000 0__ FE _I OE FO30 0 __T LJ LJ LS Lio LI Le FO30 1 fF LT L TT L T L__ F030 2 l fp SE DATA MDI KL INFO PLCGRAY PLCPAR PLCDGN L PLCTRA Fig 3 9 5 Note Refer to GSK218M CNC System
110. Fig 8 1 1 229 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 8 2 Run and stop of MDI instructions After the instructions are input by the steps in section 8 1 press me key to run the MDI ron instructions During the running the instructions execution can be stopped by pressing a key Note 1 MDI running must be performed in MDI mode Note 2 The program input in CUR MOD interface is executed prior to that input in MDI mode 8 3 Words modification and clearing of MDI instructions If an error occurs during word inputting key can be pressed to cancel the input word by word or press key to cancel the whole block input if the error is found after the input is I finished reinput the correct words to replace the wrong ones or press key to clear all for reinputting 8 4 Modes changing When the control is switched to MDI DNC Auto Edit mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the system will stop the program execution after the current block is executed When the control is switched to Step mode by a dwell during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode it will execute the step interruption See section 5 2 Step interruption If the control is switched to MPG mode by a dwell it will execute MPG interruption see section 6 2 MPG interruption If the control is switched to JOG mode by a dwell it will execute manual intervention see section 4 1 4 Manual interruption When the con
111. G Effective in the block in which it is code specified Effective till another G code of the same modal G code group is specified Example G01 and GOO are modal G code in the same group GO1X __ Z 01 effective X G01 effective G00 Z___ G00 effective Note Refer to system parameter list modal list for details Table 4 1 G codes and their functions Instruction format Function G00 X_Y_Z_ Positioning traverse Circular interpolation CW IJ Circular interpolation CCW G04 P_ or G04 X_ Dwell exact stop G1i0L_ NP R_ Programmable data input G11 Programmable data input cancel Storage stroke detection off G15 Polar coordinate instruction cancel 21 CGSN I HSU GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G16 G16 Polar coordinate instruction G17 Write in with other program in block XY plane selection G18 02 used for circular interpolation and tool ZX plane selection G19 radius compensation YZ plane selection G20 Specified by a single block at the Inch input 06 program beginning before the ee coordinate system set eee G27 Reference point return detection 2 3 4 reference point return G39 IJ IJ J_K_or G39 Corner offset circular interpolation G17 G40 xXx Y_ Tool radius compensation cancel 07 G41 X_Z_ Left hand tool radius compensation G42 YZ Right hand tool radius compensation Positive tool len
112. G code you can press the lt ENTER gt key on the panel after you select a G code as is shown in Fig 3 10 4 INDEX INFO G CODE 000001 N00000 Rapid positioning G00 Instruction format G90 G91 G00 X_Y_Z_ Function G00 instruction tool traverse via linear Interpolation to workpiece coordinate system Position specified by absolute or incremental Instruction Explanation The format function In absolute programming parameter represents Programming final coordinate in incremental Programming parameter represents axes moving Distance and direction P 1 46 S0000 T0000 MDI COPRT ALARM LG CODE PARA MACRO gt Fig 3 10 4 explanation and restriction of instructions are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in this page if you are unfamiliar with these instructions 4 Parameter interface In lt INDEX gt page press PARA soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 5 INDEX INFO PARAMETER DIAGNOSE 000001 N00000 NO MEANING 0000 parameters related to SETTING 0001 parameters related to axis control 0002 parameters related to coordinate system 0003 parameters related to travel detection 0004 parameters related to feedrate 0005 parameters related to acc dec control No bit par 0000 0002 num _ par 0000 bit par 0003 0008 num _ par 0005 bit par 0009 0010 num _ par 0010 bit par 0011 nu
113. G01 Manual feed Offset rapid traverse GOO Dwell Canned cycle comparison table G22 G89 Table 4 4 3 God Drilling Z Operation at the Retraction Z Applicate direction hole bottom direction oF High speed peck G73 Intermittent feed Rapid feed 1 r A drilling cycle Dwell indl Counter tappi G74 Feed well spindle Feed ounter tapping CW cycle Oriented spindle f G76 Feed Rapid feed Fine boring stop Drilling spot G81 Feed Rapid feed n drilling Drilling G82 Feed Dwell Rapid feed D counterboring G83 Intermittent feed ae Rapid feed Peck drilling cycle G84 Feed EAEE ee Feed Tappi ean pping Dwell gt spindle Restriction In canned cycle tool offset is ignored In canned cycle mode R can t be specified in a single block i e after canned cycle starts R instruction can t be programmed by a single block 63 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 4 1 Rough milling of circular groove G22 G23 Format G22 G98 G99 X Y Z R LL W_ Q VDF K G23 Function They are used for circular interpolations from the circle center by helical type till the circular groove programmed is machined Explanation G22 COW inner circular groove rough milling G23 CW inner circular groove rough milling l Circular groove radius it should be over the current tool radius L Cut width increment within XY plane less than tool diameter but more than 0 W Initial cut depth in Z axis which is th
114. I GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is effective If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G82 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to initial level G80 Cancel canned cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 Format G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_ Function It is used for peck drilling that the tool feeds to the hole bottom by intermittent feeding with chips removed from hole during drilling Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In increm
115. I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual OPERATE in this page which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 8 1 to Fig 3 8 4 They can also be set by parameter No 24 6 for switching to alarm interface if an alarm is issued 1 Alarm interface In lt ALARM gt page press ALARM soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 1 ALARM MESSAGE 000002 N0000 NOTHING S0000 T0100 MDI C TALARM KUSER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 1 In alarm page it displays the message of current P S alarm number See details for the alarm in Appendix 2 2 USER interface In lt ALARM gt page press USER softkey to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 2 EXT ALARM MESSAGE 000002 N0000 NOTHING S0000 T0100 MDI KALARM KUSER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 2 See GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC manual for the details of the user alarm Note The external alarm number can be set and edited by user according to the site conditions The alarm after editing is input into the system via a transfer software However the name of the file edited must be PLCALM TXT 3 HISTORY interface In lt ALARM gt page press HISTORY soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 3 202 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ALARM MESSAGE 000002 N0000 07 03 01 13 28 0000 Please power off S0000 T0100 EDIT KALARM USER HISTORY OPERATE Fi
116. List Receive Cancel 3 Click Obtain directory button the files in CNC system will be listed 4 Select the files to be transferred multiple files can be selected by pressing and holding SHIFT or CTRL key 5 Click Start receiving button for receiving and the following dialogue block will be popped up x File Name Alm Hep Save Path Erm a Receive Packs Jaa Error fp 6 Transmission is over Note The system can t receive files in DNC mode 11 2 USB communication 11 2 1 General and precautions 1 This U disk system only supports FAT16 file format if your U disk format is FAT32 or others please format your U disk to FAT format in advance in your computer or it won t be identified by this system 2 Due to the detachment of the U disk system and the CNC system the U disk system can t be entered during the machining accidents such as the workpiece damage may occur 3 This U disk system supports hot plug and play for many times make sure that the USB interface is not inserted by U disk before power on If inserted the U disk will not be identified It is better to insert U disk after the U disk operation interface is entered 4 When the U disk operation is finished pull out the U disk after waiting for a while till the indicator for U disk does not blink it will avoid the U disk data not fully operated 250 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual
117. N6 X1000 0 71000 0 N7 G41 X0 NO a N8 X 1000 0 4 N9 X1000 0 Y 1000 0 ae Tool center path Programmed path b Specified at offset mode If a block with no tool movement is exclusively specified in offset mode the vector and the tool center path are identical with that the block is not specified Refer to item 3 Offset mode And this block is executed at the single block stop position N7 NS N6G91x100 0 Y200 0 N7 G04 X100 0 NS X100 0 2 N6 Block N7 is executed here However when the block moving amount is 0 the tool movement is identical with that of the two or more blocks containing no moving instruction even only one block is specified N7 Ng N6 691x1000 2000 N7 XO N8 X11000 Note The blocks above are executed in G1 G41 mode and the path in G0 doesn t conforms to the figure c Specified with the offset cancel A vector with a length offset and the direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the previous block is formed when the block specified together with offset cancel contains no tool movement and it will be cancelled in next moving instruction 121 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual N7 N8 N6 G91X100 0 Y100 0 N7 G40 N8 X100 0 YO 10 Corner movement If two or more vector are formed at the end of the block the tool traverses straightly to another vector from one vector the movement is called corner movement If AVXSAV limit and AVYSA
118. NC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 Overview This manual is comprised by following parts Overview It describes the chapter structure system model available relative instructions and the note II Programming It describes G functions and the programming format characteristics and restrictions by NC language III Operation It describes the manual and auto operation program input output and editing methods Appendix It describes parameter list alarm list and programming data table The manual is used for GSK218M CNC system CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual II PROGRAMMING CGSN I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 General 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation 1 Tool movement along a straight line Point Program instruction GO01Y20F 100 Move from point A to point B X50 50 then from point B to point C Workpiece Tool Program Point A origin XOYO 2 Tool movement along an arc 5p Ponie GO1X 100 Y50F500 Move from point A to point B G03x50100R50 Move from point B to point C Point B Tool Program Point A origin XOYO The tool linear and arc motion function is called interpolation The programming instructions such as G01 G02 are called preparatory function which is used for interpolation for CNC device CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual a Move
119. O N H and P the other 20 letters can also be assigned for arguments Each letter from A B C D to X Y Z can be assigned once and the they need not to be assigned by letter order The addresses not assigned may be omitted Note 2 G65 should be specified prior to argument using 5 Precautions for custom macro body 1 Input by keys Press key behind the parameter words G X Y Z R J K F H M S T P Q for inputting 138 CGiSR I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 Either operation or transfer instruction can be specified in MDI mode Except G65 other parameter data can be input by keys but can t be displayed 3 H P Q R ofthe operation and transfer instructions preceding or behind G65 are all used as parameters for G65 H02 G65 P 100 Q 101 R 102 Correct N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q10 Correct 4 Variable range 99999 99999 5 The result of the variable operation can be a decimal fraction with a precision of 0 0001 All operations except H11 OR operation H12 AND operation H13 NOT operation H23 ROUNDING operation with decimal portion neglected in operation are done without the decimal portions abnegated Example 100 35 101 10 102 5 110 100 101 3 5 111 110x 102 17 5 120 100x 102 175 121 120 101 17 5 6 The execution time of operation and transfer instruction differs depending on different conditions usually the average time is
120. PG interruption with other functions Display Relation Machine lock If machine lock is effective the machine move is ineffective in MPG interruption Absolute coordinate value MPG interruption does not change the absolute coordinates Relative coordinate value MPG interruption does not change the relative coordinates Machine coordinate value Note The moving amount of MPG interruption is cleared when the manual reference The changing amount _ of machine coordinate is the displacement amount induced by MPG rotation point return is performed by each axis 6 3 Auxiliary control in MPG mode The auxiliary operation in MPG mode is identical with that in JOG mode See Section 4 2 and 4 3 for details 221 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 7 Auto Operation 7 1 Selection of the auto run programs 1 Program loading in auto mode g a Press key to enter the Auto mode b Press key to enter the program page move the cursor to find the target program c Press key for confirmation 2 Program loading in Edit mode a Press key to enter the Edit mode b Press key to enter the program page move the cursor to find the target program c Press key for confirmation d Press z key to enter the Auto mode 7 2 Auto run start A T y After select the program by the two ways of section 7 1 above press C key to execute the program the program
121. R 5 0 F200 0 To specify 100mm distance and 30 angle G91 Y120 To specify 100mm distance and 150 angle Y120 To specify 100mm distance and 270 angle G15 G80 To cancel the polar coordinate system Moreover when programming by polar coordinate system the current coordinate plane setting should be considered And the polar coordinate plane and the current coordinate plane are relevant e g in G91 mode if the current coordinate plane is specified by G17 the origin of it is defined by the X Y axis components of the current tool position If the current coordinate plane is specified by G18 the origin of it is defined by the Z X axis components of the current tool position Specified position Specified position Angle Actual position Actual position When the angle is specified When the angle is specified _ with an absolute instruction with an incremental instruction If the positioning parameter of the 1 hole cycle after G16 instruction is not specified the tool current position is the default positioning parameter of the hole cycle The 1 canned cycle instruction after the current polar coordinate must be complete or the tool moving will be wrong After G16 instruction except the hole cycle the words of the positioning parameter for tool moving involves with the special plane selection mode While the polar coordinate system is cancelled by G15 which followed by a moving instruction the tool current position is defaulted a
122. Selection of moving amount eee ceeeeeee cece ects ceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeaeeess 216 5 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeneneeaeeess 216 5 1 3 Step feed explanation cccccccccceeeeseceeqeneeeeeeeeeeseecaeeeeeeeeeeseeecueeseeeeeeeseenseeaees 217 5 2 Step INtSrrU PtlON isise ne En E eaaa EEEE E EENE AE ties 217 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step MOE cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeesenneas 217 E LERE 0 1o ERE E EE E T A 218 Gl MPG ICCA aerei E a deren e E 218 6 1 1 Moving amount SeleCtION ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaas 218 6 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction ccccceceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteteeesteeneaeeess 218 6 1 3 Explanation of MPG feed cccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceneeeeeeeeeesenccneeaeeeeeeeseseenneaeeees 219 6 2 Control in MPG interruption ccc cee ceceecee cece cece eeeeneeceeeceeeeececeaeaeeeeeeeesenesuaeeeeeeeesseeaas 219 6 2 1 MPG interruption Operation cccceeeceeceeeeceeceeeeeeeceneaeeeseeeeseecensaeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeees 219 6 2 2 Relation of MPG interruption with other functions ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 221 6 3 Auxiliary control in MPG MOdE ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeensaeeeeeeeeteeeeeas 221 7 AUlO OperatiOn ccccccssencccccsenne
123. T CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 100 S0000 T0100 MDI IREL ABS ALL MONI Fig 3 1 6 5 The clearing of Y and Z axes are the same as above 3 2 Program display Press key to enter program display that have 5 modes PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT and DIR They can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 2 1 as following 1 Program display Press PRG soft key to enter program page in this mode a page of the blocks being executed in the memory can be displayed See Fig 3 2 1 PROGRAM 000002 N0120 000002 N0060 X100 N0120 XO EE N0240 G41 X100 D1 N0300 G01 Y100 N0360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 G01 YO F2500 N0180 XO N0180 Y50 DATA Ln 4 S0000 T0100 EDIT MDIJ CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 3 2 1 181 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Press soft key PRG again it enters the program EDIT and modification page see Fig 3 2 2 PROGRAM 000002 N0120 000002 NO060 X100 N0120 X0 N0240 G41 X100 D1 N0300 G01 Y100 NO360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 G01 YO F2500 N0180 x0 N0180 Y50 DATA 0000 T0100 EDIT B EDIT EB LOGIN ECHECK SAVE RETURN Fig 3 2 2 Press P key to enter next page lt 4 REPLACE CUT COPY PASTE RETURN 1 Press P key to enter next page lt RSTR RETURN Press lt 4 key to return to last page Note The CHECK function can only be performed in Auto mod
124. TEM Programming and Operation Manual JOG mode key Spindle control keys Spindle override keys Spindle JOG key Spindle Orientation key Tool magazine operation keys Manual tool clamp release key Manual tool change key Block Skip key To enter JOG mode To enter MPG mode To enter DNC mode Spindle CCW Spindle stop Spindle CW Spindle speed adjusting spindle speed analog control effective Spindle JOG on off Spindle orientation on off Tool magazine operation on off For manual tool clamping release For manual tool change For preceding with sign skipping if it is set the indicator lights up for on 166 Switch to JOG mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop Switching to MPG mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop Switching to DNC mode in Auto mode system slowing down to stop if current block is executed MPG mode Step mode JOG mode Any mode JOG mode JOG mode JOG mode JOG mode Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode CGSR I HSU Single Block key Dry Run key M S T Lock key Machine Lock key Working Light key Lubricating key Cooling key Chip Removal key Feedrate Override keys Rapid traverse key Rapid Step and MPG override keys For switching of program block blocks if it is on the indicator lights up If itis effective the indicator lights up If the misce
125. V limit the hind vectors are ignored If these vectors are not consistent a movement around the corner is generated which belongs to the hind block This move belongs to block NG thus the feedrate is equal to that in block NB If the block N6is G00 mode the tool is moved at G00 mode while if it is G01 G02 G03 the tool is moved at G01 mode But if the path of the next block overpasses the semicircle the function above is not performed The reason is that P2 P3 P4 P5 N4 G41G91x 1500 2000 N5 1500 2000 N6 GO2J 6000 N7 GO1X 1500 2000 Programmed path NS G40x1500Y 2000 Tool center path If the vector is not ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P3 arc P4 P5 P6 P7 If the distance between P2 and P3 is ignored P3 is ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 P7 The arc cutting of the block N6 is ignored 11 Interference check 122 CGSN I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The tool overcutting is called interference The Interference check function checks the tool overcutting in advance If the interference is dectected by grammar check function after the program is loaded alarm is issued The inteference check in tool radius compensation is set by bit parameter No 41 3 Primary conditions of interference 1 The tool path is different from the program path The included angle between paths is from
126. X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G22 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 L10 W20 Q10 V10 F800 Groove rough milling cycle within a circle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canned cycle cancel and return from R level M30 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle within a circle G24 G25 Format G24 G98 G99 x Y Z R L J D F_ K G25 Function They are used to fine mill a circle by a radius and direction specified and the tool returns after milling Explanation G24 CCW fine milling within a circle G25 CW fine milling within a circle l Milling circle radius ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm use absolute value if it is a negative one J Distance of fine milling start point to circle center ranging with 0 mm 9999 999mm use absolute value if it is a negative one D Tool diameter number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The tool diameter value is obtained by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To interpolate by the transition arc 1 from the start point 66 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 6 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by arc 2 arc 3 7 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path
127. a modal datum If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the tapping axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Alarm occurs if the tapping axis is changed in rigid mode If S and axis movement instructions are specified between M29 and G84 alarm is issued If M29 is specified in a tapping cycle alarm is also issued In feed per minute mode the thread lead is obtained from the expression feedrate spindle speed Feedrate of Z axis spindle speedxthread lead Example Spindle speed1000r min Thread lead1 0mm then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 1000mm min G00 X120 Y100 Positioning M29 S1000 Rigid mode specified G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restriction F Alarm is issued if the F value specified exceeds the upper limit of the cutting feedrate S Alarm is issued if the rotation speed exceeds the max speed of the gear specified which is set by number parameter P294 297 Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored Program restart Itis ineffective during the rigid tapping 4 4 20 Left handed rigid tapping G74 Format G74 X_Y_Z R_P_F_K_ Function In rigid tapping the spindle is controlled by a servo motor This instruction can be used for
128. adius Standard setting 1000 0101 System parameter number 04 1 cn1 c39 cM om OIM 1 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change enabled 0 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change disabled CIM 1 Metric and inch conversion for workpiece coordinate system automatic change 0 Metric and inch conversion workpiece coordinate system not automatic change G39 1 Corner rounding effective in radius compensation 0 Corner rounding ineffective in radius compensation CN1 1 Interference check enabled in radius compensation 0 Interference check disabled in radius compensation Standard setting 0110 0000 System parameter number 04 2 M5B M5T RD2 RD1 Exc FXY FXY 1 Axis for drilling canned cycle is the axis selected by program 0 Axis for drilling canned cycle is Z EXC 1 To specify external action by G81 0 To specify drilling canned cycle by G81 RD1 1 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 positive 0 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 negative RD2 1 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 X 0 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 Y M5T 1 To output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in tapping cycle 0 Not to output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in tapping cycle M5B 1 To output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in drilling cycle 0 Not to output M05 at the spindle CW and CCW shift in d
129. alue in the program the basic point is moved to the specified position and it must be added the tool length compensation value which is the difference of the basic point to the tool nose Note 1 If G92 is used for coordinate system setting in tool offset the coordinate system is the one set by G92 as to the tool length compensation without the offset value added Note2 For tool radius compensation the tool offset should be cancelled if G92 is used Restriction After floating coordinate system is set the 1 canned cycle instruction should be in a complete format or the tool move will be wrong 40 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 Format G17 G18 G19 Function For circular interpolation tool radius compensation drilling or boring plane selection is needed which can be selected by G 17 G18 G19 Explanation It has no instruction parameter The system default at power on is G17 plane if parameter is not specified It can also be set by bit parameter NO 31 1 2 3 The relation of the instruction and the plane is as following G17 XY plane G18 ZX plane G19 YZ plane Plane is not changed if G17 G18 G19 is not specified in the block For example G18 X_Z ZX plane GO X_Y_ Plane unchanged ZX plane In addition the moving instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection e g in the following instruction Y
130. an ania ea aid enaa SEEE Kena AEA SE ana Ka SEa 51 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 0 2 2 eee ceecece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetenneaaes 52 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner roUNCiING cceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeeees 53 4 3 Reference point G Ode sssini sson EEEE EEEE E aE aAa 55 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 ccc ceccceccccce cece eceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesenceeseeeeeeeseeeceeaeeeeeeeetees 55 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 ee eeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeseesseesesseeseeeaseeaaeaaes 57 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 ccccccceeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeetees 57 4 3 4 Reference point return check G27 ccc ccceceeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseneeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeennes 58 4 4 Canned cycle G COde cecceccccceceeeeeeeeeee eee ceeeeeeeteneeaeeneeeeecesacceeneeeeeeeseecceaeaeeeeeeeetees 58 4 4 1 Rough milling of circular groove G22 G23 eececccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeseeeeesenneaees 64 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle within a circle G24 G25 eccccccccecceeeceececeeeeeeeeeeteeneneeeeeeeeeeeeaas 66 4 4 3 Outer circle fine milling cycle G26 G32 cccccceceeceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeteeeennaees 67 4 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 0 2 cece ceeeeee cere eteeteeceeeeeeeeeeeetees 69 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 71 4 4 6 Rectangle ou
131. anation This manual contains the precautions to protect user and machine The precautions are classified as warning and note by safety and supplementary information is regarded as explanation Read the warnings notes and explanations carefully before operation Warning Personnel may be hurted or equipment be damaged if operations and steps are not observed Note Equipment may be damaged if operation instructions or steps are not observed by user Explanation It is used for the supplementary information except for warning and note Copy right is reserved CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual CONTENT I OVERVIEW E E A E E E T 1 I PROGRAMMING wesssssscccectceceestenssdececs atetcetebdesnnte cere sitenessnneswevceesevtasanestesceds Haseeanccuetiades stances 3 1 GONGI Al E T E E T E A dade ete detesseteeadedeeress 4 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeereeseesersseree 4 1 2 Feed Feed Tut On ssiri aa raK eantanevaeaencceduunnrsevenee 5 1 3 Cutting feedrate spindle speed function sssssseesrsseeererern rres terttrtr trte trrrererrrnrnerrerr nn 6 1 4 Operation instruction miscellaneous fUNCTION ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseneeeeeeeeteeeeees 6 1 5 Tool selection for various machining Tool function ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 Tool figure and tool motion by program ccceeeeeeee
132. and dwell then retract the tool rapidly from hole bottom Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Li In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate Dwell time K_ Number of repeats aes Point R level Point R Point R After positioning along X and Z axes the tool traverses to point R level to perform the drilling from point R level to point Z level then dwells and returns rapidly after the tool reaches the hole bottom The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G82 is specified If G82 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is effective if P 78 CGSB I H
133. aneous function M code to rotate the spindle 92 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual If G89 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation hole 1 hole If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G89 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 with 1s dwell at the hole bottom then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R
134. apid traverse S Pre acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear Post acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse exponential Post acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear Auto corner feed effective Auto corner feed ineffective Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 01 7 CPCT CALT WLOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL CBOL 1 Cutting feed type post acceleration deceleration 0 Cutting feed type pre acceleration deceleration CBLS 1 Pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed S 0 Pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear CLLE 1 Post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed exponential 0 Post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear HLOE 1 JOG running type exponential 0 JOG running type linear WLOE 1 MPG running type exponential 0 MPG running type linear CALT 1 Cutting feed acceleration clamping 0 Cutting feed acceleration not clamping CPCT 1 To control the in position precision in cutting feed 0 Not control the in position precision in cutting feed Standard setting 1010 0101 System parameter number 011 RVCS RBK FFR RVIT RVIT FFR RBK 1 To execute next block after compensation as backlash is over value allowable To execute next block during compensation as backlash is over value allowable Cutting and rapid traverse bo
135. apping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in a block that contains a tapping instruction If G74 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next tapping operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it 96 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual can t be stored as a modal datum If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the tapping axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Alarm occurs if the tapping axis is changed in rigid mode If S and axis movement instructions are specified between M29 and G74 alarm is issued If M29 is specified in a tapping cycle alarm is also issued The thread lead is obtained from the expression feedrate spindle speed Feedrate of Z axis spindle speedxthread lead Example Spindle speed1000r min Thread lead1 0mm Then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 1000mm min G00 X120 Y100 Positioning M29 S1000 R
136. at emergency 169 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The power should be cut off immediately to prevent from incident in emergency situation during the machine running And the zero return and tool setting should be performed again because of the error between the system coordinate and actual coordinate of the position after power off Note Refer to the machine builder s manual for cutting off the machine power 2 3 Safety operations 2 3 1 Reset operation I The system is in reset mode after pressing key 1 All axes movement stops 2 The M S functions are ineffective 3 Whether to save G codes or not after modifying bit parameters N35 1 N35 7 and N36 0 N36 7 and resetting 4 Whether to clear F H D codes or not after modifying bit parameters N34 7 and resetting 5 Whether to delete the program or not after modifying bit parameters N28 7 and resetting in MDI mode 6 Whether to clear the executing DNC program display or not after modifying bit parameters N23 2 and resetting 7 Whether to cancel local coordinate or not after modifying bit parameters N10 3 and resetting 8 Whether to clear the macro common variables 0 99 or not after modifying bit parameters N52 6 and resetting It can be used in system abnormal output and coordinate axis action 2 3 2 Emergency stop If the emergency button is pressed during machine running the system enters into emergency status and the maching movement is s
137. ath An alarm is displayed and the operation Overcutting if the operation would not stop 3 Machining a step smaller than the tool radius When machining a slot smaller than the tool radius specified by circular machining in the case of a program containing this step the tool center path with the common offset becomes reverse to the programmed direction In this case the first vector is ignored and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position This single block operation is stopped at this point If the machining is not in the single block mode the auto run is continued If the step is linear no alarm will be issued and the tool cuts correctly But uncut part will remain 125 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Linear movement Stop position after execution ofa single block Fi Tool center path Programmed path Arc machining Arc center An overcutting will result if the first vector is not ignored Ne first vector is ignored Starting tool radius compensation and cutting along Z axis It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool radius compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining In the case above if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid feed and cutting feed follow the precedure below For block N3 Z axis moving instruction it is divided as following N
138. axis 0010 External workpiece origin offset amount along X axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0011 External workpiece origin offset amount along Y axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0012 External workpiece origin offset amount along Z axis 0 0000 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0013 External workpiece origin offset amount along 4th 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0014 External workpiece origin offset amount along 5th 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0015 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54 _X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 276 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0016 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0017 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0018 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0019 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 1 G54_ 5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0020 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0021 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_Y Setti
139. be performed at an intermediate point Note 2 The Single Block function is ineffective if the subprogram calling M98 or the subprogram calling return M99 instruction is specified But for a block with M98 or M99 if M98 or M99 block contains an address other than N O P the Single Block function is effective 7 7 Running with machine lock o In Auto mode press key The MACHINE LOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is Machine lock In this mode the machine axes don t move But the position coordinates displayed are the same as that during machine moving And M S T are effective too This function is used for program verification 225 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Note Due to that the machine position is not consistent with its coordinate position after wap key is pressed and program running the machine zero operation is needed to be performed 7 8 Running with M S T lock VEN In lt AUTO gt mode press key The M S T LOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is M S T LOCK In this mode the M S T instructions are not executed This function is used for program verification together with the Machine Lock Note M00 M30 M98 M99 is executed by convention 7 9 Feedrate and rapid override in auto run In lt AUTO gt mode the feedrate and rapid traverse speed can be overriden by the system In auto run the feedrate override c
140. blinks input the setting data then press lt ENTER gt key to enter the data into coordinate system 2 Absolute mode It displays the absolute coordinate of the current tool by pressing ABS soft key which is called absolute in following see Fig 3 1 2 176 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ACT POS ABSOLUTE 000002 N0120 000014 N00000 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 56 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 100 S0000 T0100 MDI REL TABS ALL MONI Fig 3 1 2 3 All mode Itenters ALL mode by pressing ALL soft key the coordinates in the following coordinate system can be displayed together A The position in relative coordinate system B The position in absolute coordinate system C The position in machine coordinate system D The offset amount in Handle interruption displacement E Subspeed F Remaining distance only displayed in Auto MDI DNC mode The display is as follows Fig 3 1 3 ACTUAL POSTTION 000002 N0120 CRELATIVE CABSOLUTE CMACHINE X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Yy 0 0000 y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 CHANDLE INTR SUBSPEED CREM DIST X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Yy 0 0000 y 0 0000 y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 s0000 T0100 MDI REL ABSI CALI MONI Fig 3 1 3 177
141. cccsserecceecnneeeuessnnsesssnensnesuesunnecsessensnsesenneneaeeseesesesuenseseseanenesseasens 155 TA WAV OTS CO ean e e E a a stones 155 7 2 Cutting feedrate issoria aeneon EE REE ENEKE KEE aaa EEKEREN EEE 155 7 2 1 Feed per minute G94 oo cceeceecceeceee eee eeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeaeeeeeeeesseneneeneees 156 7 2 2 Feed per revolution G95 oo ccccccecccecceeceeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseseceeaeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeees 156 7 3 Tangential speed controles isinisisi raoissa 157 CA Feedrate override Key vais sccccccevcsies cecal ecveves seiceecsinasbede es cagtaeadees tevdei ca caenencpveeeenesasaneeties 157 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration c ccccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceneaaeeeeeeeeeesenccieeeeeeeeteseeaas 158 7 6 Acceleration deceleration for corner Of a block ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeeeeees 159 Vil CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 8 Tool Function siscctsiascisaut scennatasanesseacavstuadsakeiesduaniabasdrsacnsidsbebadaatddaeeccestaaesadolendueniataidedanniduaesed 160 8 1 TOOL TUNCHOM ae cosiiciencssecivetesidetin tnweweccetausnctreideaeeneciannstavtengesededkanesemnadsanseguasueiedaneadeansseees 160 HE OPERATION E E ssvetcecene reds E E 161 1 Operator Panel variassiccesssansnreszivances seusechsseiecdtassenebenrisvascereidseastrveacedardssugautactsbuuereseastaniatend rszas 162 1 1 Panel layout siisii einega eni s iiaia a aaea 162 1 2 Explanation of the panel fun
142. ccececeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneaeees 188 3 9 Setting displays eap i e r a E ea Ea aero en EAE EE aaro 189 3 5 1 Setting PAGE eskisine oraaa eaea aare EAEE EEEE ENANA OE NEE KENE AE EEE 189 3 5 2 Parameter and program on off page cccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeesesneneaeeess 191 3 5 3 Coordinate setting interface ccccccecccceceeeceeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceesaeeeeeeeesseeenseeeees 192 3 5 4 Display and setting of the machine soft panel ccceccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeetenteeeeees 193 3 5 5 SOMO pagg riesenia ae E E NEEE e e EEEE AAEE AEE ENE EEE KEET EEES 194 3 5 6 Backup restore and transfer of the data cc ccccseesseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeas 194 3 5 7 Password authority setting and modification c ccccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeetetneeeeeees 195 3 6 Graphic GIS play tunics iin tained GQ Wie edely erie idan nea 197 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 7 Diagnosis displayer ioris iee ian daresi daroie adohi adaos A Sinesarentapeenets 198 3 7 1 Diagnosis data display ssciiii c aniio esnean iiaae iia iaeaea ii 199 3 2 Signal VIEWING sesaria eee ea aaa a aerat iaia Taas eaea 201 3 8 Alarmi diS play sssrin eaa inakaa eaae oaan asn 201 3 9 JIPEC GISDlAYy anoa E E ees ec gee series 204 310 UNGS GIS Play aiisdies sd vena vec cacd ates Pace a a va caa canara a E a 206 4 Mantial OD Cation ac isscciccscscccccttestnzscencectzecestasetesecectectanavecua
143. cceecceceeceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeseeneneaeeeeeeeetees 26 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 ccccccceceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 32 A259 ID WON GO saaien enana cs oa yc ge a daa ev nan seta hs ce ENEAS ANENE ENEA EE nena bees 33 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 6 Unidirectional positioning G60O ccccceeceeececeeeceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeseseeneaeeeeeeeetees 33 4 2 7 System parameter online modification G10 2 0 0 cee cecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 34 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G9 eee eeecccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeseeteeeeeeteeeetees 35 4 2 9 Additional workpiece Coordinate SYStOM ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee sees eaeeeaaeeaeeeaaeeaes 37 4 2 10 Machine coordinate system selection G53 ccccecccceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 oo ee cccceee cece eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeetencaeeeeeeeeteeeeneaaes 39 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 eee ccccccec cece ceecceee cece ects sececneeseeeeeteseencneaeeeeeeeetees 41 4 2 13 Polar coordinate system setup cancel G16 G15 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaees 41 4 2 14 Scaling in plane G51 G50 0 0 cece c cece ee cee eee eeeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeaeeeeeeeetees 43 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 c cccecceeeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeeteeneaees 47 42 16 SKIP TUNCUON GII scrierii irinn oneni
144. ccucadecssusdesnatecrusdecerdsenetaesinenzeeessees 211 4 1 Coordinate axis movement cccceeceeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeesescceeeaeeeseeeeeencnieaeeeeeeeess 211 AVA Manual feed sscn sscceers csvescsendvececcenceountnneedeuenesdannas geeeededdeesaanewecaseenersuannewetens cuaaiarsenes 211 4 1 2 Manual rapid traverse 0 nn nn nn nn nin nin nil iii iii inne enne ene 211 4 1 3 JOG feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection cccceeeteeeeees 211 414 Manual interventions 3 siestes ain iri asi aerate eed 212 4 2 SPINS COMM sonores beret veaecseanvan eee EEEE AEE A aT EKE aak 213 421 Spindle COW erusa ae a a eee eet Sd a eed 213 42 2 Spindle CW oures ishti aoei aa haeke aaa ena aaae k 213 423 Spinde StoP iieo e e a E aa aa aeaea E a ENS 214 4 2 4 Spindle auto gear Shift ccc ceeccececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneceneeeeeeeeeeseeneas 214 4 3 Other manual operations c ccccecceeceeceneeeeeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeesecccneeaeeeseseeeeneneeaeeeeeeeess 214 4 3 1 COOMA COMMON ss ersiesceccscostesontenndsneyssea sienna ca ceasesbesnnand exceacesbbemanterenmeaetatiecaeae saree 214 4 3 2 Lubricating Controleer ccna iia EEN 215 4 3 3 CHIP TOMOVAL rissie aane aa E AEEA aA EEE RE E E 215 5 SOP Operation cssenccccsesneeccssseneccensesnenenseneenensnnenesccsencesecuenanceseaunneeecaseneeceseaeeeesessansessesenesens 216 Dal Step Tee dinee E e E EOE EE evans 216 5 1 1
145. ck that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Annotation The value of Z and R must be specified in the back boring cycle programming Alarm occurs if point Z is below point R Example M3 S500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G87 X300 Y 250 Z 120 R 150 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 orient at the initial level then shift by 5mm and dwell at point Z for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G86 G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 17 Boring cycle G88 Format G88 X_YZR_P F_ Function It is used to bore a hole Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the 90 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level
146. code are specified in a same block the instructions are executed in the following two ways 1 Simultaneous execution of the move and T instructions 2 Executing T instruction upon completion of the move instruction The selection of either 1 or 2 depends on the machine builder s specifications Refer to the machine builder s manual for details 160 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Il OPERATION 161 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 Operator Panel 1 1 Panel layout The 218M machine center has an integrated operator panel which is comprised by LCD area edit area interface display area and machine control area The layout of it is shown as following Edit area C GSE CNC GSR zor om Soft keys area N o gt D BLOCK SKIP SINGLE MOCK DRY RUN a roy MST i m A SER F alallolelo Lele EmA aaa cw STO cw s 8 S ORENTATION METU MAHNELOOK WORKING Lk Wur Wa Yuk RAPID x ih rs z v0 In fetal 4 P ee A f y ayy a Pi GaL e om m GES E us el alla sr agi we al D D MAG ZERO MAG CO M tia CUUMPREASE cHMGER MACNN COOLING CHP REWAVA 0 00 0 0 D VERRAVEL PNG RSTAT OFONA 5 Control area 1 2 Explanation of the panel function 1 2 1 LCD area The display area of this system is applied with a 10 4 inch chromatic LCD that has 640x480 resolution 1 2 2 Edit area 162 CGS I HI
147. codes in 01 group are used for cancelling canned cycle gt The processing data once specified in canned cycle are effective till the canned cycle is cancelled Therefore after all the processing data required for hole machining are specified in the beginning of the canned cycle only the data to be changed is needed to be respecified in the following canned cycle Note The feedrate specified by F remains effective even the canned cycle is cancelled In single mode the canned cycle has 3 stage working type positioning R level initial level In canned cycle the data of hole machining and hole position will be eliminated if the system is reset The instance of dada retained and eliminated is shown as following table Table 4 4 2 Designation of data GO00X M3 G81X Y Z R F Specify values for Z R F in the beginning G81 Z R F can be omitted due to the identical hole Y machining mode and data specified in Drill the hole for the length Y once by G81 Move in X axis relative to hole Do the hole machining by G82 and data Z R F specified in and P in G80X Y Hole machining is not performed Cancel all the hole data Explanation G82X P Because all data are cancelled in Z R needs to be G85X Z R P respecified and F that remains can be omitted P is saved but not needed in this block It is a hole machining with a different Z value to And there is moving only in X axis
148. coefficient of 5TH axis instruction 1 CMR Setting range 1 256 0165 Frequency dividing coefficient of X axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 256 instruction CMD 289 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 1 256 0167 Setting range 1 256 0168 Setting range 1 256 0169 Setting range 1 256 0170 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0171 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0172 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0173 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0174 Setting range 0 9999 9999 0175 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0176 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0177 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0178 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0179 Frequency dividing coefficient of Z _ axis instruction CMD Frequency dividing coefficient of 4TH axis instruction CMD Frequency dividing coefficient of 5TH axis instruction CMD In position width of 5TH axis servo 0 0000 290 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0180 Cutting feed in position width setting of axes 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0181 Maximum position error allowable for axes moving 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0182 Maximum position error allowable for axes stopping 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0183 Position error limit when axis servo is off 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0184 Servo error allowable f
149. cro instructions 4 7 2 Macro variables Both the common CNC instructions and the variables operation as well as the transfer instructions can be used in the custom macro body It begins with program number and ends with M99 132 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 08000 Program number G65 H01 Operation instruction G90 GOO X 101 CNC instructions using variables G65 H82 Transfer instruction MOO Custom macro body ends The composition of custom macro body 1 Variables usage With a variable the parameter value in custom macro body can be specified The variable value can be assigned by the main program or set by LCD MDI or be assigned by a computation during custom macro body execution Multiple variables can be used in custom macro and they are differentiated by their variable numbers 1 Variable representation The variable is expressed by a sign followed by a variable number Format Bite tt 2s 3 A gut e g 5 109 1005 2 Variable citation The variable can be used to replace the value of parameter e g F 103 When 103 15 it is the same as F15 G 130 When 103 3 it is the same as G3 Note 1 Variable cann t be cited by parameter word O and N program number and sequence number Such as O 100 N 120 are not permitted in programming Note 2 Variable exceeding the max limit of the parameter can t be used When 30 120 M 30 exceeds the max limit of
150. ction cccccceceeeeeeceee ects eeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeteeeetes 162 t241 LCDa gesn en Sa aroa iea ae EEN E ER 162 12 2 EB CIt APO oise aeria E anr EENE FOEKE KAANE EEE EEEE REES 162 1 2 3 Screen operation keyS cceceeccececeeeceeeceeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeesenqnneeeeeeeeeeteeneas 164 124 Control ALC Aes ccscavedesceseceessshestesedeacyests e aaiae na aaea NE 165 2 System Power On Off and Safety Operations ssscccssesecccsessenrenessenssssesnenessssseneesssseneeeseess 169 2 1 System power ON o oo cece cee cceeceeeceee cece cece cecceeeceeeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeeesesesccneeaeeeeeeeeseseeieaeeeeeeeess 169 2 2 System POWE Off serrures n e enanta aake eaa anaana duchess enund eelenpeegeauhereos 169 2 39 Safety operation Sieira ee eek fa ER Oraa E n a anane avis 170 23 1 ResetoperatioM osiers neaei eaan eera eaaa Ee ein 170 2 9 2 Emergency StOP sc ssssic isaisa tie oun iss asia ia Ht ea aed Wia Eaa N ena Ea KEN 170 2 353 Feed WON siiski aaa aaa a aaan ten 171 2 4 Cycle start and feed hold ccccccceceeceececeeeeeeeeee sees eaeeceeeeeeesesaeeseeeseeeseencnseaeeeeeeeess 171 2 5 Overtravel protection ccecccccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeseeenasaneeeeeeeseesenceneeeeeeeees 171 2 5 1 Hardware overtravel protection eeen 171 2 5 2 Software overtravel protection ccccccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeteteenees 172 2 5 3 Release of the overtravel Alarim
151. d as shown in above figure And the retraction is performed by the retraction value d Fig 4 4 1 1 set in number parameter P270 The rapid tool retraction for a distance d is performed in each intermittent feeding If G73 and M codes are specified in a same block M code is executed during the 1 hole positioning operation then the system goes on the next drilling operation If the repetition K is specified M code is only executed for the first hole Note 1 If parameter Q is not specified alarm address Q not found G73 G83 will be issued If Q value is specified for a negative the intermittent feed will be performed by the absolute value of Q Note 2 In canned cycle if the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level T5 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored Example 1 M3 S1500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G73 X0 YO Z 15 R 10 Q5 F120 Positioning and drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 50 Positioning and drill hole 2 then return to point R level Y 80 Positioning and drill hole 3 then return to point R level X10 Positioning and drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y10 Positioning and drill
152. d for the programming shape in plane rotating by a center point specified as an origin G69 is used for cancellation of coordinate system rotation Angle of rotation Center of rotation Explanation 1 G68 is an optional parameter with 2 positioning parameters that are used for specifying the rotation center If the rotation center is not specified the tool current position is regarded as the center by system The positioning parameters are relevant to the current coordinate plane while X Y for G17 Z X for G18 Y Z for G19 2 Whether the current positioning mode is absolute or incremental the rotation center can only be specified by absolute positioning of Cartesian coordinate system G68 can be followed by a command parameter R the value of the parameter is the angle to be rotated The positive value is for CCW rotation and the angle unit is degree If no rotation angle is specified in this function the angle will be set by number parameter P329 3 In G91 mode the rotation angle last rotation angle current angle specified by R in G68 instruction 4 When the system is in rotation mode plane selection is not allowed or errors will be shown Attention should be paid in programming 5 In coordinate system rotation mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can t be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled if needed 6 After coor
153. d supply coolant the machine spindle motor and cooling pump switches must be controlled by actual requirement Coolant ON OFF The programs or machine on off actions controlled by system NC instructions are called miscellaneous functions which are instructed by M code Example If M03 is instructed the spindle rotates clockwise by the speed specified Clockwise direction means the direction viewed from the spindle Z direction 1 5 Tool selection for various machining Tool function It is necessary to select a proper tool when drilling tapping boring milling etc is performed When a number is assigned for each tool and the number is specified in the program the corresponding tool is selected CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool number ATC magazine Example When No 01 is assigned to a drilling tool When the tool is stored at location 01 in the ATC magazine the tool can be selected by specifying T01 This is called the tool function 1 6 Tool figure and tool motion by program 1 6 1 Tool length compensation Usually several tools are used for machining one workpiece If instructions such as GOZO are executed in a same coordinate system because tools have different tool lengths the distances from tool end to workpiece are different So it is very troublesome to change the program frequently Therefore the length of each tool used should be measured in advance By setting t
154. ddress Range Meaning O 0 99999 Program name 0 99999 Sequence number 00 99 Preparatory function 99999 999 99999 999 mm X coordinate address 0 001 9999 999 s Dwell time 99999 999 99999 999 mm Y coordinate address 99999 999 99999 999 mm Z coordinate address 99999 999 99999 999 mm Arc radius angle displacement 99999 999 99999 999 mm R level in canned cycle CGSR I HSU Address 99999 999 99999 999 mm GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Meaning Arc center vector in X axis relative to start point 99999 999 99999 999 mm Arc center vector in Y axis relative to start point 99999 999 99999 999 mm Arc center vector in Z axis relative to start point 0 99999 mm min Feed in a minute 0 001 500 mmi r Feed in a revolution 0 99999 r min Spindle speed 00 04 Multi gear spindle output 0 128 Tool function 00 99 Miscellaneous function output program executing process subprogram calling 1 9999999 ms Dwell time 1 99999 99999 999 99999 999 mm Subprogram number calling Cutting depth or hole bottom offset in canned cycle 01 99 Operator for G65 00 99 Length offset number 00 99 Radius offset number Special attention should be paid that the limits in table 2 1 are all for CNC device but not for machine tool Therefore programming should
155. de at power on or clearing CLR 1 MDI reset key to clear external reset signal make emergency stop 0 MDI reset key to reset external signal make emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0010 265 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual System parameter number a2 or 03 2 CIR 1 0 AD2 1 0 Make alarm if distance from start point to center and radius not specified in circular interpolation Do not make alarm if distance from start point to center and radius not specified in circular interpolation Make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block Do not make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 0 3 3 M3B EOR m30 M02 POL NOP NOP 1 Block with only program number EOB sequence number ignored 0 Block with only program number EOB sequence number preread POL 1 To program using decimal point 0 To program not using decimal point M02 1 To return to block beginning when M02 is being executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M02 is being executed M30 1 To return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed EOR 1 To make alarm if occurs in execution 0 To reset if occurs in execution M3B 1 At most three M codes allowable i
156. de descends for a gear 5 till 0 each time the key is pressed The actual spindle speed speed specifiedx spindle override The max spindle speed is set by number parameter No 258 if the spindle speed exceeds the max value set it uses the max speed 7 11 Cooling control Press key in the panel to switch on the cooling on off this key is a compound key The cooling indicator lighting up means the cooling ON indicator gone off means the cooling OFF 7 12 Background edit in auto run The background edit function in processing is supported in this system During the program execution in Auto mode press lt PROGRAM gt key to enter the program page then press PRG soft key to enter the background edit interface as is shown in Fig 7 12 1 227 CGSN I HSU GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PROGRAM 000002 N0120 N0180 N0240 N0300 N0360 N0420 N0180 N0180 DATA X0 G01 X50 Y50 F2000 G41 X100 DI G01 Y100 G02 X200 R50 G01 YO F2500 X0 Y50 Ln 2 AUTO BG EDT BG END CHECK SAVE RETURN P gt Fig 7 12 1 Press BG EDT soft key to enter the program background edit interface the program editing operation is the same as that in Edit mode Refer to Chapter 10 Program Edit in this manual Then press B LOG soft key to save the edited program and exit this interface 228 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 8 MDI Operati
157. dinate system rotation the tool radius compensation tool length 48 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual compensation tool offset and other compensation operation will be performed 7 If coordinate system rotation is performed in scaling mode G51 the rotation center coordinate values will be scaled If the rotation angle is not scaled when the moving instruction is given the scaling will be executed first then the coordinate system rotation In scaling mode G51 the coordinate system rotation instruction G68 can t be given in tool radius compensation G41 G42 it should always be specified before tool radius compensation Example 1 Rotation G92 X 50 Y 50 G69 G17 G68 X 50Y 50 R60 G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X100 G02 Y100 R100 G3 X 100 I 50 J 50 G01 Y 100 G69 Tool path after rotation Originally programmed tool path 0 0 60 50 50 Rotation center Example 2 Scaling and rotation G51 X300 Y150 P0 5 G68 X200 Y100 R45 G01 G90 X400 Y100 G91 Y100 X 200 Y 100 X200 G69 G50 49 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual When scaling and coordinate system rotation are applied When only coordinate system rotation is applied When only scaling is applied Cutting program 100 0 Example 3 Repetition of G68 By program main program G92 X0 YO Z20 G69 G17 M3 S1000 G0Z22 G51 X0Y011 2 J1 2 G42 D01 offset setting M98 P2100 P0
158. drill IE holes Program examples for calling custom macro body is as following 00010 G65 H01 P 500 Q100000 G65 H01 P 501 Q 200000 G65 H01 P 502 Q100000 G65 H01 P 503 Q20000 G65 H01 P 504 Q12 G92 X0 YO Z0 M98 P9010 XO YO M30 145 X0 100MM Yo 200MM R 100MM A 20 N 12 in CCW direction Calling custom macro CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 Miscellaneous Function M code The M codes available in this system are listed as following Program ends and returns to program begining workpieces added by 1 Program ends and returns to program M codes used by begining workpieces added by 1 Calling subprogram Subprogram ends and returns program execution repeated M codes controlled M00 Program dwell by PLC 146 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual When move instruction and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block the instructions are executed in one of the following two ways 1 Simultaneous execution of the move instruction and miscellaneous function instruction 2 Executing miscellaneous function instructions on completion of the move instruction execution The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder s specification Refer to the manual by the machine builder for details When a numerial value is specified following address M code sigal and strobe signal are sent to the machi
159. e B EDIT Jand B LOGIN Jare used only in AUTO and DNC mode background edit function Functions of B EDIT are the same as the lt EDIT gt mode that is described in CHAPTER 10 Program Edit Save the editing by B LOGIN Jor exit the background EDIT page by RETURN after editing 2 MDI display Press MDI soft key to enter MDI page in this mode multiple blocks can be edited and executed The program format is the same as the editing program MDI mode is applicable to simple program testing operation See Fig 3 2 3 182 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual PROGRAM MDI 000002 N0120 000000 CABSOLUTE G00 G17 G90 G54 G21 G40 X 0 0000 G98 Gl5 G50 G69 Y 0 0000 F 0 AF 0 Z 0 0000 s 0 M 30 H 0000 D 0000 DATA S0000 T0100 EDIT L PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT IDIR Fig 3 2 3 3 Program CUR MOD display Press CUR MOD soft key to enter current mode interface it displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the current mode MDI data input and running are available in MDI mode See Fig 3 2 4 PROGRAM CURRENT MODAL 000002 N0120 CURRENT MODAL X G00 F 1000 Y GI7 S 1000 Z G90 M 30 A G94 T 0000 B G54 H 0000 R G21 D 0000 I G40 Po K G11 P G98 Y 0 0000 Q GI5 Z 0 0000 F G50 L S G69 SPRM 02500 4 ae SMAX 100000 DATA S0000 T0100 MDI K PRG MDI CUR MODIK CUR NXTILKDIRY Fig 3 2 4 4 Program CUR NXT display Press CUR NXT soft key
160. e 0 400 ms 0299 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and tapping axis 2nd gear Setting range 0 400 ms 0300 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and tapping axis 3rd gear Setting range 0 400 ms 298 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0302 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 1st gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0303 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 2nd gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0304 Time constants of spindle and tapping axis in 20 retraction 3rd gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0306 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 1st gear Setting range 0 9999 0307 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range 0 9999 0308 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 9999 0310 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 1st gear Setting range 0 9999 9999 0311 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range 0 9999 9999 0312 Spindle loop gain coefficient in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 9999 9999 0314 Spindle in position width in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 0315 Tapping axis in position width in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 0316 Position error limit of tapping axis
161. e confirm the detection point the top of the tool nose or tool collet As is shown in Fig 2 6 4 if the detection point is A tool nose the distance a should be used as the data for storage detection if the detection point is B tool collet the distance b should be used as the data for storage detection When the detection point is A tool nose and the tool length varies with the tool the forbidden area should be set up according to the longest tool as such may ensure the safe running 174 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool position after reference point return Area boundary eee Fig 2 6 4 To setup forbidden area The overlapping of tool forbidden areas The forbidden areas can be set by overlapping as is 4 shown in following figure Fig 2 6 5 The overlapped forbidden areas Unnecessary limit should be set beyond the machine stroke 5 Forbidden area to be effective the forbidden area boundary takes effective immediately after the manual reference point return or auto reference point return by G28 instruction at power on If the reference point is within the forbidden area at power on an alarm will be issued effective only for G12 of storage stroke 2 6 Alarm cancellation if the tool enters the forbidden area with an alarm being issued it can only move reversely To cancel alarm move the tool reverselly till it exits the forbidden area and the syste
162. e Of DIOCK 0 cece ceccccee cece eeeeceee aces eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseseecneeeeeeeeseeeeneas 242 10 1 7 Replacement of the blocks ccccccececeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeesencneeeeeeeeteteneeas 242 10 1 8 Rename of a program cccceeeececccceceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeecenaaeeeeeeeeeesenccaeeeeeeseteseeneas 242 103129 Program eStart sscscccecssssescesesteeeecsvssrsdoadeecceevays Median a aiae aa 242 10 2 Program management cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeneneteeetee 244 10 2 1 Program directory search ccceccccceceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeccceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 244 10 2 2 Number of the program Stored ccccceeeceeceeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeecenceneeeeeeeeteeeeeaas 244 10 2 3 Memory capacity ciicecsscssccdestacvedeasssarneseate cesesvsunstenseve ceeds a aE EEN EEA 244 10 2 4 Viewing of the program list cccceceeeceeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeecenneeeeeeeeeeetenees 244 10 2 5 IPrOQraim IOCK 2 ccccisctisccecanschaest vecaususcs sheen ts ceesunas a aea aE eaa Ea EEE AEE Ea aE 245 11 CommM nication wascsccsnsace cts ccsdenstedacetees cadesiee sede ceeesasssxendaccenesz sssvedaseseenazdextesaaduesecat sestalasdenede 246 11 1 Serial COMMUNICATION sinse ceca sacaeenetesa veuaaacecueedeyg Eea E NN Eie 246 114 1 PROGRAM Start ess esciees rseson naaa Eaa AAE EOE EENE ENEE EEEE 246 11 1 2 Function introduction 0 0 einen n
163. e a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G76 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S500 Spindle running start G90 G99 G76 X300 Y 250 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Z 150 R 100 Q5 Orient at the hole bottom then shift by 5mm P1000 F120 Stop at the hole bottom for 1s 85 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alar
164. e axis relative moving The incremental value is irrelevant with the coordinate system concerned it only uses moving direction and distance of the end point relative to the start point The absolute instruction and the incremental instruction are specified by G90 and G91 respectively lt End point 30 0 Start point UJ vw 40 0 Tao oe a Fig 2 4 3 1 For the moving from start point to end point in Fig 2 4 3 1 the programming by absolute instruction G90 and incremental instruction G91 are as follows G90 GO X40 Y70 or G91 GO X 60 Y40 The action can be performed by both programming methods that can be expediently used by operator Explanation gt No instruction parameter It can be written into the block with other instructions gt G90 and G91 are the same group mode i e if G90 is specified while G91 not the mode is G90 default If G91 specified while G90 not the mode is G91 System parameter G90 or G91 mode specified for the default positioning parameter at power on can be set by bit parameter NO 31 4 parameter is 1 32 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 X_ orP_ Function The dwell is executed by G04 and the execution of next block is delayed by the time specified In addition a dwell can be specified to make an exact stop check in cutting mode G64 X 0 9999 999 X for second P 0 99999 9999 P for millisecond Explanation 1 G04 is
165. e by indexing sequence of indexing table 0 A type by indexing sequence of indexing table Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 05 1 SBM G67 G67 1 To make alarm if macro instructions cancelled by non macro modal instrucions 0 Do not make alarm if macro instructions cancelled by non macro modal instrucions SBM 1 Single block allowed in macro statement 0 Single block unallowed in macro statement Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 2 CLV cev CCV 1 Macro common variables 100 199 clearing after reset 0 Macro common variables 100 199 not clearing after reset CLV 1 Macro local variables 1 50 clearing after reset 0 Macro local variables 1 50 not clearing after reset Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 5 3 LAD3 LDA2 LAD1 LADO 272 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual LADO LAD3_ They are binary combined parameters If it is 0 magazine use not calling macro if they are 1 15 magazine use calling O90001 O900015 respectively Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 5 4 znm ZNM _ 1 To amplify the center and override display 0 Not to amplify the center and override display Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number olsls5
166. e cece ceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeceneaeeeeeeeeseeeeees 7 1 6 1 Tool length compensation cccceceeeceeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeceesaeeeeeeeettenensnneeees 7 1 6 2 Tool radius Compensation cccccceeceeeceeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeseseeucueeeeeeeeeseesnseaeeees 7 1 7 Tool movement range StrOke cccccccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeess 8 2 Part Program COMPOSITION u1sscccccccccenceecececncnennnneneeeceensnnsuaneaneecesesanasannaneecesesensesenaneseeseseneesanaes 9 2 1 IPFOGFAMICOMPOSIUOM scseee seccetieeeedevescbendeiecsdzecs coaster Ploudeedececuetasbindeves A EAE aaa E ERE 9 241 Program Name visits teh ieee nae eis Soi nine aaa in 9 2 1 2 Sequence number and DIOCK cccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeccueeeeeeeeeeeeeeennas 10 2 1 3 Instruction WOM 2 siscssss dade ctedeadenseesd a soinnun En Sea Winsted eee even iadan eiaa 10 2 2 General structure Of a program cceceececeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeceieaeeeeeeeetees 11 2 2 1 Subprogram editorin ne ees deb N E EENE AE e NEn 12 22 2 Subprogram Calll sssi oare e ea aanne NEE EE AENEAN AAEE EE 13 2 2 9 Program engi sisssood eian eiaa ei aaan lath nent el dansiecad lees 14 3 Programming FUNCAMENEAIS 12 11 c1ccccccccccccenenneneeeceensnensnneneseceensneaaneneeecesesanseenaneseeseseneesenas 15 3 1 Controlled AXIS icine nin ana ani Eaa E aA EREA aE EEr ENEKE
167. e center from the start point or the end point Tool center path Y Tool center path R Programmed path Old vector Start point lt O Programmed path A Start point Old vector right G42 By contrast to G41 G42 specifies the tool to deviate at the right side of the workpiece along Tool radius compensation the tool advancing direction l e the vector direction got in G42 is reverse to the vector direction got in G41 Besides the direction the deviation of G42 is identical with that of G41 In G00 G01 mode G42X_Y_D_ x 1 New vector G42X_Y__ Programmed path Start point Old vector Tool center path 2 In G02 G03 mode ae a New vector Programmed see Gaia x Y path Programmed path R Tool center path Start point Old vector TE Tool center path Old vector Start point Fig 4 5 2 A Precautions on offset 106 6 CGSB I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual A Specification of offset number G41 G42 and G40 are modal instructions The offset number is specified by D code they can be specified at any place from the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode Alarm is issued if G41 G42 instructions are not followed by moving instructions B From the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode The moving instruction must be positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 when the mode is switched from the offset cance
168. e coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats G86 G98 G86 G99 Spindle CCW Fon kaea F an fi Point R Spindle CCW ied Point R level b g Point Z pa a Spindle stop Spindle stop After positioning along X and Y axis the tool rapidly traverses to point R level And boring is performed from point R level to point Z level When the tool reaches the hole bottom it is retracted in traverse Before specifying G86 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G86 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G86 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level
169. e distance below R level and it is over 0 if the initial cut depth exceeds the groove bottom it should machine by this bottom Q Cut depth of each feed V Distance to the end surface at rapid tool traverse which is over O D Tool diameter number ranging within O 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is got by the given number K Repetitions Cycle process 1 Rapid to a location in XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 To cut W depth downward by cutting feedrate 4 From center outward to mill a circle surface with a radius helically by a L increment each time 5 Z axis rapidly returns to R level 6 X Y axes rapidly position to the circle center 7 Z axis rapid downward to a location with a distance V to the end surface 8 To cut aa Q V depth downward in Z axis 9 Repeat the actions from 4 8 till the total depth of circle surface is finished 0 Return to initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path 64 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual J 1 Initial level waeeeeeee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee gt Cutting feed 1 2 PointR A gt Rapid feed 0 mo 3 6 5 4 G22 G23 Example To rough mill a groove within a circle by canned cycle G22 instruction which is as follows 65 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Z 1 G90 GOO
170. e eeeeeeeete neern 8 IND X50 VSO p stusisteenenstincasinte stss 9 N10 G01 Z 25 F100 nsee seese 10 N11 G04 P2000 scccistttscncenimnarien weer a N12 G00 Z57 H0O sasasi ann cue 12 N13 X 200 Y 60 assess san e sewn 13 N14 M30 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Format G41 D_X_Y_ G42 D_X_Y_ G40 X_Y_ Function G41 specifies the left offset of the tool moving G42 specifies the right offset of the tool moving 103 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G40 specifies the tool radius compensation cancel Explanation 1 Tool radius compensation As following figure to cut workpiece A using the tool with the radius R the tool center path is shown as B the distance from B to A is R the distance that the tool deviates from the workpiece A is called compensation B Offset tool center path A Programmed path Vector Offset and vector The tool radius compensation is programmed for machining program by programmer During the machining the tool diameter is measured and input into the CNC memory And the tool path turns into a offset path B 2 Offset value D value The radius offset number is specified by D code and the new moving instruction value is obtained by the value of the offset number plusing or subtracting the moving value of the program The offset number can be specified by DOO D127 as required The diameter or radius value of it can be set by bit parameter No 4
171. e of the circle with the center regarded as the basic point XO YO radius R and the initial angle A Center X Y Radius R X0 YO is the coordinate of the basic point in bolt hole cycle R radius A initial angle N Number Parameters above using the following variables 500 X coordinate value of basic point Xo 501 Y coordinate value of basic point Y0 502 Radius R 503 Initial angle A 144 CGSN I Hist 504 If N gt O for N holes in CCW direction If N lt O for N holes in CW direction Number GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual The following variables are used for the operation in macro 100 For the counting of the hole machining i 101 The final value of the counting N IE 102 The angle of the i thhole 8i 103 X coordinate of the i th hole Xi 104 Y coordinate of the i th hole Yi 09010 N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q O G65 H22 P 101 Q 504 N200 G65 H04 P 102 Q 100 R3600 00 G65 H05 P 102 Q 102 R 504 G65 H02 P 102 Q 503 R 102 G65 H32 P 103 Q 502 R 102 G65 H02 P 103 Q 500 R 103 G65 H31 P 104 Q 502 R 102 G65 H02 P 104 Q 501 R 104 G90 G00 X 103 Y 104 M10 G65 H02 P 100 Q 100 R1 G65 H84 P200 Q 100 R 101 M99 The custom macro body can be programmed as following i 0 IE N 8i A 360 xI N X i X i R COS 6i Y i Y i R SIN 6i The i th hole positioning Hole drilling M code output i i 1 When i lt IE it goes to N200 to
172. e overriden by the override keys on the operator panel The override range from 0 150 16 gears with 10 per gear In AUTO mode if the feedrate override is adjusted for zero the feeding is stopped by the system with 0 cutting override displayed The execution is continued if the override is readjusted 157 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration The stable start and stop can be done by auto acceleration deceleration at the beginning and the end of the moving controlled by the system motor And the auto acceleration deceleration can also be done when the moving speed is changed so the speed can be changed steadily Therefore the acceleration deceleration needn t to be considered for programming Rapid traverse Pre acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 S type hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Cutting feed Pre acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 S type hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type JOG feed Hind acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Set the universal time constant for each axis by parameters Rapid traverse rate Fr Rapid traverse rate TR Acceleration deceleration time constant for rap id traverse rate Time Speed Time Speed after interpolation Speed after acceleration and deceleration 158 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC
173. e overtravel protection The overtravel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the machine X Y Z axis respectively If the overtravel occurs the moving axis slows down and stops after it touches the limit switch And the overtravel alarm is issued _ rr Decelerating to stop ih i Deceleration switch 171 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Explanation Overtravel in Auto mode In Auto mode if the tool contacts the stroke limit switch during moving along an axis all the axes movement are slowed down to stop with the overtravel alarm being issued The program execution is stopped at the block where the overtravel occurs Overtravel in JOG mode In JOG mode any axis contacts the stroke limit switch all axes will slow down immediately and stop 2 5 2 Software overtravel protection The software strokes of the machine are set by the number parameters NO 66 NO 75 appendix 1 referring to machine coordinate values Overtravel alarm occurs if the machine position coordinate exceeds the setting software stroke The alarm issued before or after overtravel for software limit overtravel is set by bit parameter No 11 7 During the overtravel alarm move the axis reversely in JOG mode the alarm will be cancelled after the axis is moved out of the overtravel range 2 5 3 Release of the overtravel alarm The method for overtravel alarm is in JOG mode press
174. e point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0056 Y coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0057 Z coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0058 4TH coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0059 5TH coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 280 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0060 X coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0061 Y coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0062 Z coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0063 4TH coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0064 5TH coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0065 Moving amount per revolution of rotary axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 deg 0066 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of s
175. e returning instruction M99 After M99 execution the control returns to next block following the block that calls the subprogram in the main program to go on execution If the main program end is M99 the program execution can be repeated Main program Subprogram Subprogram One4evel nesting Two evel nesting Fig 2 5 Two level subprogram nesting A single subprogram call instruction can be continuously and repeatedly used to call a subprogram up to 999 times 2 2 1 Subprogram edit Write out a subprogram by following format CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0o Otro Subprogram number Subprogram M99 Subprogram end Write out the subprogram number behind the address O at the subprogram beginning and the M99 instruction at the subprogram end M99 format as above 2 2 2 Subprogram call The subprogram is called out for execution by the main program or the subprogram The instruction format is as following m38 PUAITI L JHU ae a a Repetition count Subprogram number e f the repeat time is omitted the default is 1 Example M98 P1002L5 It means No 1002 subprogram is continuously called for 5 times e M98 P__ cann t be in a block with movement instruction e Execution sequence of subprogram call from main program Main program Subprogram NDOIO aranana 2 3 omm HOO aeeoe ae N1020 N0030 M98 P10100L2 N1030 a n NOO40 N1040 NOOS0 M98 P10100 WiO
176. eS le types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Linear linear Circular linear Programmed path r Tool center path Tool center path Circular Linear Linear Linear Workpiece Programmed path Tool center path 4 Tool center path Programmes path 115 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual d Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 Linear linear Tool center path Start position 5 Offset direction change in offset mode The offset direction is defined by tool radius compensation G code The sign of the offset value is as following ae a G code Gar G42 In a special situation the offset direction can be changed in offset mode however the direction change is unallowed in the start up block and the block following it There is no inner and outer side when the offset direction is changed The following offset value is assumed to be positive i Linear linear ii Linear circular Programmed path Proqrammed sea G42 Tool center path tiii Circular linear G42 Tool center path Le G41 Programmed path Programmed path v For the offset without an intersection When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if intersection of 116 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual the offset path is not req
177. ech enterprise integrated with research education industry and trade by enhancing the popularization and trade of CNC machine tools There are more than 1400 staffs in this company that involves 4 doctors more than 50 graduate students and 500 engineers and more than 50 among them are qualified with senior technical post titles The high performance cost ratio products of GSK are popularized in China and Southeast Asia And the market occupation of GSK s product dominates first and the turnout and sale ranks the top in internal industry for successive 7 years from the year 2000 to 2006 which makes it the largest CNC manufacture base throughout China The main products provided by our company includes the NC equipments and devices such as GSK series turning machine milling machine machining center CNC system DA98 DA98A DA98B DA98D series full digital stepper motor drive device DY3 series compound stepper driver device DF3 series response stepper motor driver device GSK SJT series AC servo motors CT L NC slider and so on The current national standard and international standard industry standard as well as the enterprise standard or enterprise internal standard as a supplementary are completely implemented in our production process The capability of abundant technology development and complete production and quality system qualified by us will undoubtedly ensure the reliable product to serve our customers 24 48 hours technological s
178. ecified by absolute value And the feedrate is the speed specified by F in operation 3 while in operation 5 it is a traverse speed or a speed specified by F code due to the different machining type In Fig 4 4 2 B the distance from the initial level to point R level is specified by incremental value or point R level coodinate is specified by absolute value The speeds in operation 2 and 6 are both traverse It is used to specify the cut in value or the parallel moving value in G76 or G87 Data for hole canned cycle instruction can be followed by a parameter P_ which specifies the dwell time after the tool reaches the Z plane The time unit is ms The min value of the parameter can be set by number parameter P281 and the max value by number parameter P282 The repetition is specified in parameter K_ which is effective only in the specified block It can be omitted and the default is one time The max drilling times are 99999 If a negative value is specified it executes by absolute values If zero is specified the mode is changed without drilling operation machining a It is used to specify the dwell time at the hole bottom The 60 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Restriction gt Drilling instruction G__ can t be specified in a single block or alarm is issued by the system gt The canned cycle is modal instruction which is effective till it is cancelled by a G code gt G80 and G
179. ed 150 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 6 S codes for Spindle Function The code signal converted to analog signal by S code and the numerical value followed is sent to the machine to control the machine spindle S is a modal value 6 1 Spindle analog control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 0 the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage specified by address S and the numerical value followed See details about it in OPERATION manual Format S Explanation 1 A block can contain only one S code 2 The spindle speed can be specified directly by address S and a numerical value followed The unit of it is r min e g For M3 S300 it means the spindle runs at a speed of 300 r min 3 Ifthe move instruction and S code are specified in a same block they are executed simultaneously 4 The spindle speed is controlled by S code followed by a numerical value 6 2 Spindle switch volume control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 1 the spindle speed is controlled by switch volume specified by address S and two digits number followed Four gears are available in this system as spindle speed is controlled by switch volume See details on the correspondence of S code and the spindle speed as well as the gears in the manual by machine builder Format S01 S1 S02 S2 S03 S3 S04 S4 Explanation 1 Alarm is issued and the execution stops if S code beyond the codes above is specified i
180. ed this function is effective till G62 G63 or G64 is specified The tool is decelerated for an in position check at the end point of a block then next block is executed Tapping mode G63 Once specified this function is effective till G62 G61 or G64 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block but the next block is executed When G63 is specified feedrate override and feed hold are both ineffective Cutting mode G64 Once specified this function is effective till G62 G61 or G63 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block and the next block is executed Explanation No parameter format G64 is the system default feed mode no deceleration is performed at the end point of a block and next block is executed directly The purpose of in position check in dwell mode is to check whether the servo motor has reached within a specified range In exact stop mode the tool movement paths in cutting mode and tapping mode are different See following Fig 4 6 1 1 129 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual T 2 _ Position check Tool path in the exact stop mode 1 Tool path in the cutting mode or tapping mode 0 X Fig 4 6 1 1 Tool path from block 1 to block 2 4 6 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 Format G62 Function Once specified this function is effective till G63 G61 or G64 is specified When the tool moves along an in
181. ed by system To send system configuration and backup files requires the machine builder or dealer level authority you can enter the relevant password in CNC password setting page 4 Open file dialogue block will appear after partition selection press and hold SHIFT or CTRL key to select multiple files the maximum 100 files can be selected 5 Click Open button to return to Send file dialogue block after the file is selected 6 The name of the program file sent to user partition should be headed with letter O followed with a number within 5 digits including 5 Or the following dialogue block will pop up to prompt you to alter the program name Old Name HAT 2 NC New Name 02 HC Only accept O Numeral type 7 After returning to Send file dialogue block click Send button the file sending will be on and the following dialogue block will be popped up SI x 8 Transmission is over Note The system can t send files in DNC mode 3 Transfer type for receiving files 1 Open and set the serial port with a fixed baudrate 115200 the data bits stop bit and parity check are identical with that in DNC transmission and it can t be changed pit Beesive File 2 Open the Receive file item of transfer type menu or press the button in tool column the following dialogue block will pop up 249 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Fila
182. eeeeeeeeeeesecccneeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 230 8 3 Words modification and clearing of MDI instructions cccccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 230 8 4 Modes cha giNgi i misssing n aa aa adea Ea a aa ce aaas a E E 230 9 Machine Zero Operation naccccrccccessecacecceteiartanaceceneetessrenaucdeecescdesrateanendersiedesddsasunacdecereeresau 231 9 1 Conception of machine Zero cee ceeceeee cece eeeeeeee aces eeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeeeesesenseieeeeeeeeeeteenaes 231 9 2 Steps for machine Zero ccccceeceeeceeceeee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceneaaeeeeeeeeeeseeccieeeeeeeeteseeneas 232 9 3 Machine Zero steps by Prograim ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenteeteeenneeeeeetness 232 10 Elit Operation APEE E E E E AET 234 TOM Programiedit siiis iosa aei iesea ea iua S aana GES KEAS Sada pens AE uaaa Si teeny ee 234 10 121 Pro ram Creation sivieccscesisssnezccosseassenntadeetnceasssbinececdeeeperesbhaedanad cecates NAO 235 10 1 2 Deletion of a single Programm ccccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 240 10 1 3 Deletion of all Drograms ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeesenceneeseeeeeeeteneeas 240 10 1 4 Copy Of a Program ceeccccccececeeccece cee eeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeseceneaaeeeeeeeeeeseecnieeseeeeeteteeees 241 10 1 5 Copy and paste of DIOCKS ecccccecceeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeceneaaeeeeeeeeeecenceneeeeeeeetetenneas 241 10 1 6 Cut and past
183. emporarily cancelled by the following instructions specified by parameter No 40 2 Refer to offset cancel and offset start for the details of this operation a G28 automatic reference point return If G28 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored after reference point return G28 Intermediate position G42 G00 Origin b gt G29 automatic return from reference point If G29 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored at the next block If it is specified immediately after G28 118 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G28 Intermediate position G00 G42 If it is not specified immediately after G28 G29 Intermediate position G42 G00 7 Tool radius compensation G code in offset mode In offset mode if the tool radius compensation G code G41 G42 is specified a vector perpendicular to the previous block will be created which is irrelative to the machining inner or outer side If this G code is specified in circular instructions the arc will not be correctly generated If this code is specified in a circular instruction correct motion will not be obtained Refer to 5 for offset direction change by tool radius compensation G G41 G42 Linear linear G42 mode A block specified by G42 Tool center path S Intersection Circular
184. en reference point not setup use tongue For non linear positioning axes interlock all axes stop For non linear positioning axes interlock axes interlock Standard setting 0001 0000 System parameter number 0 0 5 IPR Isc ISC 1 Min moving unit of 0 0001mm 0 0001deg 0 Min moving unit of 0 001mm 0 001deg IPR 1 Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit effective Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 00 6 MAOB ZPLS EDN EDP ZRN ZRN 1 System alarms if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running 0 System doesn t alarm if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running EDP 1 Rapid traverse and cutting effective of each axis external positive deceleration signal 0 Rapid feed effective of each axis external positive deceleration signal EDN 1 Rapid traverse and cutting effective of each axis external negative deceleration signal 0 Rapid feed effective of each axis external negative deceleration signal ZPLS 1 Zero type selection one revolution signal 0 Zero type selection non one revolution signal MAOB 1 Zero type selection for non one revolution signal B 0 Zero type selection for non one revolution signal A Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number olol7 ZMI5 ZMi4
185. ensation override of 4TH axis Setting range 0 99 9999 0235 Pitch error compensation override of 5TH axis 0 001 Setting range 0 99 9999 0240 Gain adjustment data for spindle analog output Setting range 0 9999 0241 Compensation value of offset voltage for spindle analog output Setting range 0 9999 0242 Spindle speed at spindle orientation or motor speed 50 at spindle gear shift Setting range 0 9999 r min 0245 Time of spindle speed in position signal detection 200 Setting range 0 1000 ms 0246 Spindle maximum speed to gear 1 5000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0247 Spindle maximum speed to gear 2 5000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0248 Spindle maximum speed to gear 3 5000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0250 Spindle motor speed of gear 1 gear 2 shift 0 Setting range 0 1000 r min 0252 Spindle motor speed of gear 1 gear 2 shift in 50 tapping cycle Setting range 0 1000 r min 0254 Axis as counting for surface speed control Setting range 0O 5 0255 Spindle minimum speed for constant surface speed 100 control G96 295 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 0 9999 r min 0257 Spindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle 2000 Setting range 0 5000 r min 0258 Spindle upper limit speed 5000 Setting range 0 5000 r min 0259 Spindle servo loop gain Setting range 0 9999 9999 0260 Spindle speed baudrate with no alarm for
186. ent 246 11 1 3 Software USAGE seceeeccivsseeiaied deadassesentindscenegarasuncaadeas cebansssiala nee ceseatestetaaaee enone 247 11 2 USB COMMUNICATION 2 260262 ceed ccs sdeed aeetis faeces eoedtansey len eeeeevedbanat sue oeeveaieanaeecsreteeeee 250 11 2 1 General and precautions ccccccceceeeceeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeieaeeeeeeeeseneenas 250 1122 U dis kenty ioris e o el bassinet ode Pinas Sines addenda 251 11 2 3 USB part program operation Steps c cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeees 251 11 2 4 DNC processing operation Steps cecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeaeeeseeeeseeeeees 252 11 2 5 U disk SySteM Xits esiccis nsescvececdecntnnvex ede cevsnnnseeens ervadosuhsnebaweneecadobnaestewadecasdomnanee 252 11 2 6 Remarks for U disk model ccccccceeceeeeeee cece eeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeieaeeeseeeeeeeeseas 252 PAPPENDIXOT EE E N E E EE A A 253 CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Wl Bit PArAMPlel ications i ieee E EEn ened ieenadeteetyaedbeededivdaies EaR EEE 254 2 Nu mberparameter iiicseccivesceccecesceceeezeencbeuseeesbendenecdennsedecxeaesedensaveuee E cdececntaeeshendaneeananevea es 275 APPENDIX 2 sasicanscscesseseactvcsdidsneticccnvesdccevntascateve scdsevbassecbacededsseesdetenuspaddecesasesneue vesesttedsssstestexeieiaa 305 XI CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual I OVERVIEW CGS I HIS GSK218M C
187. ental mode 2 Return point plane G98 initial level G99 R level 3 Hole machining type G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 Initial level and R level Initial level It is the absolute position where the tool locates in Z axis before the canned cycle R level It is also called safe plane it is a position in Z axis when the traverse is switched to the feeding in canned cycle which is usually positioned at a distance from the workpiece surface to prevent the tool from colliding with the workpiece and provide a sufficient distance to finish the acceleration The instructions of G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 specify all the 59 CGiSR I HIS GSK218MCNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual data hole location data hole machining data repetition by which a block is constituted The format for hole machining is shown as following Gil G C Xo Y Z R Q P F K 3 Hole machining data Hole position data Hole machining type Therein the significance of the hole location data and machining data is as following Table 4 4 1 Table 4 4 1 Parameter Designation Explanation word Hole n G Refer to Table 4 4 3 note the restrictions above machining The hole location is specified by absolute value or X Y incremental value and the control is identical to the GOO positioning Data for hole location As Fig 4 4 2 A shows the distance from point R level to the hole bottom is specified by incremental value or the hole bottom coordinate is sp
188. ental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R Depth of cut for each cutting feed F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats 79 CGGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G83 G98 G83 G99 Initial level d Q Point Z Point Z Fig 4 4 4 1 Q It specifies each cutting depth expressed by incremental value In the second and the following feeding the tool rapidly traverse to the position which has a distance d to the end position of last drilling and still performs the feeding d that is set by parameter P270 as is shown in Fig 4 4 4 1 Only positive value can be specified for Q and the negative value is used as a positive one with its negative sign ignored Q is specified in drilling block it can t be stored as a modal datum if it is specified in the block containing no drilling The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G83 is specified If G83 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed
189. er is moving around the outer side of the workpiece it will pass around the inner side and vice versa The figure below shows the example Generally the offset value is programmed to be positive When a tool path is programmed as in figure a if the offset value is made for negative the tool center moves asin b and vice versa So the same program permits cutting for male or female shape and the gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset value 4 Tool center path iene b Tool center path Cd Overcutting by tool radius compensation 1 Machining an inner side of the corner at a radius smaller than the tool radius When the radius of a corner is smaller than the tool radius because the inner offsetting of the tool will result in overcuttings an alarm will be issued and this is because overcutting is generated when the single block execution is stopped 124 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool center path me An alarm is generated m and the operation Programmed path stops An alarm is generated and the operation stops here in single block operation T If the CNC does not stop overcutting occurs 2 When machining a groove smaller than the tool radius since the tool redius offset forces the path of the tool center to move in the reverse of the programmed direction overcutting will result Tool center p
190. et C 0044 G27 G30 instruction can t be instructed in canned cycle 0045 Address Q not found or Q is 0 G73 G83 0046 illegal reference point return 0047 machine zero should be executed before executing the instruction the setting format is not supported by G10 306 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual oore oomen O 0073 program number already in use 0094 P type not allowed coordinate 0097 P type not allowed auto execution 0098 G28 found in sequence return 0099 MDI not allowed after retrieval 0101 Memory data disordered after power off please ensure correct location 0110 data overflow 0111 operated data overflow 0112 divided by zero 0113 improper instruction 0095 P type not allowed EXT OFS CHG 0096 P type not allowed WRK OFS CHG 0116 write protected variable 0118 parenthesis nesting error 0119 M00 M02 M06 M98 M99 and M30 can t be in a same block with other M codes 0122 quadruplicate macro mode calling 0123 macro unallowed in DNC 0124 Illegal program end 307 0100 parameter write effective 0115 illegal variable CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ores mema O 0126 illegal loop number 0150 illegal tool group number 0151 tool group number not found 0148 illegal data setting 0152 no space for tool data 0149 format error in G10L3 0156 P L instruction not found 0157 too many tool groups 0158 illegal tool life data
191. eted there is no name of this file in U disk file display To copy CNC program from system user disk to U disk a Press SYSTEM disk soft key to switch to system disk file display b Press UP or DOWN key to select the CNC program in system disk c Press COPY soft key it prompts at the page bottom Are you sure to copy this file to system disk press lt CANCEL gt key to cancel the copy press lt ENTER gt key to start the copy and the page prompts copy After the copy is finished it prompts at the page bottom Copy is finished The operator should note that if there is a file with the same name in U disk this file will be covered To delete files from the system user disk a Press SYSTEM disk soft key to switch to system disk file display b Press UP or DOWN key to select the CNC program in system disk c Press DELETE soft key it prompts at the page bottom Are you sure to delete current 251 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual file press lt CANCEL gt key to cancel the deletion press lt ENTER gt key to start the deletion d After the file is deleted there is no name of this file in system disk file display 11 2 4 DNC processing operation steps 1 After CNC system start set I O channel value for 1 in lt SETTING gt page see details in OPERATION Section 3 5 1 2 Insert the U disk 3 Press DNC key it prompts at the page bottom Please select file in pr
192. etting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0078 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0079 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0080 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0081 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 282 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0082 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0083 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0084 Setting range 9999 9999 0 0000 mm 0085 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0086 Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 2 Positive 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Negative 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 2 Positive 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Dry run speed 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0087 Cutting feedrate at power on 300 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0088 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0089 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0090 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0091 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0092 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0093 Setting range
193. ey is pressed 4 Press key See Section 2 3 1 5 Press EMERGENCY STOP button See Section 2 3 2 In addition if the control is switched to other mode from Auto mode DNC mode MDI 223 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual interface of MDI mode in which the program being executed the machine can also be stopped The steps are as following 1 If the control is switched to Edit MDI DNC mode the machine stops after the current block is executed 2 If the control is switched to JOG MPG Step mode the machine interruption stops immediately 3 If the control is switched to Machine zero interface the machine slows down to stop 7 4 Auto running from an arbitrary block This system permits the current program to be executed from an arbitrary block of it The steps are as following 3 5 Press key to enter Edit mode then press key to enter program page select the program to be executed in DIR Open the program and move the cursor to the block to be executed JOG Start spindle and other miscellaneous functions by pressing key to enter JOG mode g Press key to enter Auto mode amp l gt Press L key to execute the program automatically Note 1 Before execution confirm the current coordinate point to be the end of the block preceding to the block to be executed confirmation of the current coordinate point is unnecessary if the block to be executed is absolute programmin
194. f MPG See details in the Section 6 2 Controlling in MPG interruption The step interruption coordinate system clearing steps press CTRL X till X flickers then press lt CANCEL gt key the coordinate system will be cleared The operations of Y Z are the same as above while the zero returning is being performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step mode The auxiliary control in Step mode is the same as that in JOG mode See details in section 4 2 and 4 3 of this manual 217 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 6 MPG Operation 6 1 MPG feed Press alik key to enter the MPG mode in this mode the machine movement is controlled by a handwheel 6 1 1 Moving amount selection The moving increment will be displayed if a key in t ae 9 is pressed e g If press key it displays the MPG increment in lt POSITION gt interface 0 100 See Fig 6 1 1 ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 56 0000 WHEEL INC G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 0000 T0100 MPG EREL ABS ALL MONI Fig 6 1 1 6 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction In MPG mode select the moving axis to be controlled by handwheel press the corresponding key then the axis can be moved by handwheel In MPG mode if X axis is to be co
195. fault mode at power on can be set for G00 value is 0 or G01 value is 1 by altering the system bit parameter NO 31 0 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 A Circular interpolation G02 G03 Prescriptions for G02 G03 The plane circular interpolation means that the arc path is to be finished by the specified rotation and radius or circle center from the start point to the end point in the specified plane Because the arc path can t be defined only by the start point and the end point other conditions are needed gt Arc rotation direction G02 G03 gt Circular interpolation plane G17 G18 G19 gt Circle center coordinate or radius which gives two programming Format Circle center coordinate I J K or radius R programming Only the three points above are all confirmed could the interpolation operation be done in coordinate system The circular interpolation can be done by the following instructions to make the tool to go along an arc it is shown as follows 26 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Arc in XY plane G02 R_ G17 X_Y_ F_ G03 IJ Arc in ZX plane G02 R_ G18 XZ F_ G03 K_ Arc in YZ plane G02 R_ G19 Y F_ G03 JK Arc specification on XY plane To specify plane Arc specification on ZX plane Arc specification on YZ plane To specify rotation CW direction Two axes of X Y Z End point coordinate in axis workpiece coordinate system G90 Final
196. for the 1st hole If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G83 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q15 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R level 80 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 11 Right handed tapping cycle G84 Format G84 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_ Function It is used for tapping In tapping when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle runs reversely Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the i
197. fore this axis backlash compensation begins which will make the other axes move a small distance in the backlash compensation period and that will ensure the resultant path deviating the real path least 0376 Axes moving sequence to program beginning 12345 Setting range 0 99999 0380 Referential counter capacity of X axis Setting range 0 9999 0381 Referential counter capacity of Y axis Setting range 0 9999 0382 Setting range 0 9999 Referential counter capacity of Z axis 303 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0383 Referential counter capacity of 4TH axis io Setting range 0 9999 0384 Referential counter capacity of 5TH axis a Setting range 0 9999 304 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual APPENDIX 2 Alarm List Ae anton mae the program files are up to the upper limit 0014 Gos cant be speed tis notsuppored by hesprde os womayaes SSS o 305 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual oat meea P semene O 0032 illegal compensation value in G10 0035 the compensation instruction changed when establishing tool offset 0036 G31 can t be instructed 0037 plane change disabled in offset C 0038 interference in arc block 0039 tool nose positioning error in offset C To change the worpiece coordinate system in offset C executing 0041 interference in offset C 0042 more than ten nonmovable instructions in offs
198. ft keys Note The pages by soft keys above can also be displayed by continuously pressing the corresponding functional keys Refer to Chapter 3 in this manual for the details of these pages 1 2 4 Control area 5 nDl n l lljo gt D gt T AUTO Mi CHINE 730 s J06 MPG BLOCK SKIP SWGLE BLOCK DRY RUN x y ez Dih m ae a EERO ORES So o m O tL Rl tf on cow sto w V i NS sue smmm vscloce wwe OCC woane ul nut anut uu rap ex ey z h me VQ AB 5 W Ne eueTon ESN el Ee Z i 4 4 WA P Op sew a MAG ZERI MAG CCW MAG CW FORWARD CLAMPYRELEASE T CHANGER LUBRICATING COOLING CHP REMOVAL 0 00 OVERTRAVE PROG RESTANT PTIONAL STO FEED HOLD CYCLE STARI Function Remarks and ks Name explanation operation explanation Switching to Edit mode in Auto mode system Edit mode key To enter Edit mode slowing down to stop if current block is executed In this mode internal Auto mode ke qe ANRT Aue rogram is memo y mod ry prog selected Switching to MDI mode in Auto mode system To enter MDI y MDI mode key slowing down to stop if mode current block is executed Switching to Machine zero mode in Auto mode system immediately slowing down to stop Machine zero To enter Machine mode key zero mode Switching to Step mode To enter Step in Auto mode system mode immediately slowing down to stop Step mode key 165 CGSN I Hist GSK218M CNC SYS
199. fy radius wear G10 L20P_X_ Y_ Z A B Set or modify additional workpiece zero offset Note In parameter input mode except annotation statement other NC statement can t be specified G10 must be specified in a single block or the alarm occurs It should be noted that the parameter input mode must be cancelled by G11 for after G10 for program normal use The parameter value modified by G10 must be within the system parameter range If not alarm occurs The canned cycle mode must be cancelled prior to G10 execution or alarm occurs 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 Format G54 G59 Function It specifies the current workpiece coordinate system It is used to select workpiece coordinate system by specifying workpiece coordinate system G code in program Explanation 1 No instruction parameter 2 6 workpiece coordinate system can be set in the system any of which can be selected by G54 G59 instruction 3 G54 workpiece coordinate system 1 is selected automatically by system after machine zero return at power on The absolute position on displayer is the coordinate set in G54 coordinate system G54 ete Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 cee Workpiece coordinate system 3 Gof ae Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 seekers Workpiece coordinate system 5 G50 tae Workpiece coordinate system 6 4 When different workpiece coordinate system is called by block the axis for
200. g 3 8 3 4 OPERATE interface In lt ALARM gt page press OPERATE soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 8 4 The OPERATE page displays the modification message on the system parameters and ladders e g the modification content and time OPERATE HISTORY 000002 N0000 07 03 01 13 32 MODIFY BIT PARA 0021 7 07 03 02 15 39 MODIFY BIT PARA 0023 7 S0000 T0100 EDIT KALARM USER HISTORY OPERATE Fig 3 8 4 OPERATE and HISTORY alarm interface can display 34 pages of alarm history message such as the alarm time alarm number alarm message and page numbers and they can be viewed by page keys The recording of the HISTORY and OPERATE can be deleted by pressing lt DELETE gt key system debugger level or above 203 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 9 PLC display Press the key to display the PLC page there are 5 modes INFO PLCGRA PLCPAR PLCGDN PLCTRA in this page which can be viewed as following by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 9 1 to Fig 3 9 5 PLCINFO RUN FILE Ladder 01 VERSION MT NAME VINDICATOR GSK Coder MODIFY DATE 2007 1 6 15 54 LADDER MAX ROW 0803 1600 LEVEL1 020 LEVEL2 0783 EXECUTE MAX STEP 3055 4700 LEVEL1 086 LEVEL2 2969 X MT gt PLC X0 X63 C COUNTER CO C127 Y PLC gt MT YO Y63 T VAR TIMER TO T127 F NC gt PLC FO F63 D DATA TABLE DO D255 G PLC gt NC G0 G63 K KEEP RELAY K0 K63 RCINTE R
201. g and contains G00 G01 Note 2 If the block to be executed is tool change operation etc ensure that the interference between the tool and the workpiece at current position which may cause machine damage or personnel hurt will not occur 7 5 Dry run Before the program execution a dry run can be performed to have a check for the program which is usually used together with MACHINE LOCK M S T LOCK 224 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual an Press key to enter Auto mode press key the Dry Run indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is DRY RUN In rapid feed the program speed is dry run speed x rapid override In cutting feed the program speed is dry run speed x feedrate override Note 1 The dry run speed is set by the number parameter No 86 Note 2 The effectiveness of dry run in cutting feed is set by the bit parameter No 12 6 Note 3 The effectiveness of dry run in rapid positioning is set by the bit parameter No 12 7 7 6 Single block running Single Block can be selected for checking a block execution a Press key to enter Auto mode press O key The SINGLE BLOCK indicator in panel lighting up means the current mode is Single Block In this mode the system stops after a block is executed Press key to go on next block execution perform the operation repeatedly till the whole program is executed Note 1 In G28 mode the single block stop can
202. g of X axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0332 Scaling of Y axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0333 Scaling of Z axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0334 Dwell time of unidirectional positioning Setting range 0 10 s 0335 Direction and overtravel amount of X axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0336 Direction and overtravel amount of Y axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0337 Direction and overtravel amount of Z axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0338 Direction and overtravel amount of 4TH axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0339 Direction and overtravel amount of 5TH axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0340 Axis number of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 0341 Rotation speed of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 301 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0342 Rotation insertion ineffective limit of controlled axis in normal direction Setting range 0 9999 9999 0343 Moving limit to be executed by the last program normal angle Setting range 0 9999 9999 0344 Rotation limit of the controlled axis in normal direction inserted by a single block Setting range 0 9999 9999 0345 Minimum angle of indexing table Setting range 0 9999 9999 0350 Feedrate by tool length measurement
203. gth compensation G49 Tool length compensation cancel 42 G51 Scaling cancel G51 X_Y_Z_ P_ Scaling 00 Wiite ite the piagam Machine coordinate system selection Workpiece coordinate system 1 05 Write into the block with other program usually placed at the program beginning Workpiece coordinate system 6 00 G60 X_Y_Z F_ Unidirectional position G61 Exact stop mode G62 Automatic corner override G63 Tapping mode G64 Cutting mode 00 G65 H_P i Q j R k Macro program instruction 3 G68 X_Y_R_ Coordinate system rotation G69 Coordinate system rotation cancel 09 G73 X_Y ZR Q_F_ Peck drilling cycle Write into the block with other program Canned cycle cancel G81 X_YZRF_ Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle 22 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Incremental programming G92 X_Y Z_ Coordinate system set G94 Feed per minute G95 Feed per revolution G96S_ Constant surface speed control Ccutting speed G97S Constant surface speed control cancel cutting speed Write into the block with other program Return to initial point in canned cycle Return to point R level in canned cycle Note 1 For the G code with sign when the power is switched on the system is in the state of this G code Note 2 G codes except G10 G11 in 00 group are all non modal G code Note 3 Alarm occu
204. hannel To be set by user s requirement Absolute programming 0 Absolute programming 1 Incremental programming Automatic sequence number 190 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 The number is not inserted by system automatically when inputting program by keyboard in Edit mode 1 The number is inserted automatically by system when inputting program by keyboard in Edit mode The number increment of blocks can be set by number parameter No 0210 7 Stop number This function can be used to specify the program execution to stop at a block specified but the program number and the block number should be specified together for this function E g 00060 program number means program number O00060 00100 sequence number means block number NO0100 d Press key to confirm the entry 3 5 2 Parameter and program on off page 1 Press SWITCH soft key to enter switch setting page The page is shown as following see Fig 3 5 2 SETTING 000002 N0120 _PAR SWITCH OFF ON PAR SWITCH OFF ON S0000 T0100 EDIT SETTING SWITCH G54 G59 PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 2 2 Operation explanation In page above the user can set the parameter and program switch The operation steps are as following Ca Enter the lt MDI gt mode the parameter ON should be in MDI mode parameter OFF and program ON and OFF may be in any mode Cb Enter the lt SET gt page input the corresponding password in the 2
205. he difference between the length of the standard tool and the length of each tool in the CNC usually the 1st tool machining can be performed without altering the program even when the tool is changed After the tool positioning in Z axis e g GOZO the distances of the tool end to the workpiece are identical This function is called tool length compensation 1 6 2 Tool radius compensation Because a tool has a radius if the tool goes by the path given by program the workpiece will be cut off a part for a radius wide To simplify the programming the program can be run by CNC 7 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual around the workpiece with the tool radius deviated while the transient path of the intersections of the lines or the arcs can be processed automatically by system Tl Cutter path using cutter radius compensation Machined part figure Workpiece Cutter If diameters of tools are stored in the CNC tool compensation list the tool can be moved by tool radius apart from the machining part figure by calling different radius compensation according to program This function is called tool radius compensation 1 7 Tool movement range stroke The parameter setting can specify the safe tool running range if the tool exceeds the range the system stops all the axes moving with overtravel alarm given This function is called stroke verification namely the software l
206. he arc at the corner is formed so that the vector at the end of the arc is perpendicular to the vector defined by the I J K values It is shown as follows 127 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual X axis In offset mode N1 Y10 0 N2 G39 I 1 0 J2 0 k N3 X 10 0 Y20 0 Y axis Block N2 Block N1 Offset vector x Block N3 Programmed ar aa ae rad path l 1 0 J 2 0 Too center path 10 0 20 0 Fig 4 5 4 2 G39 containing I J K 4 5 5 Tool offset value and number input by program G10 Format G10L10P_R_ Geometric offset value of H code G10L12P_R_ Geometric offset value of D code G10L11P_R_ Wear offset value of H code G10L13P_R_ Wear offset value of D code P Tool offset number R Tool offset value in absolute mode G90 For the tool offset value in incremental mode G91 it is added by the value of the offset number specified the result is the tool offset value Explanation The range of tool offset value Geometric offset metric input 999 999mm inch input 99 9999 inch Wear offset metric input 99 999mm inch input 9 9999 inch Note For inch and metric switch the tool offset value automatic change is set by bit parameter No 41 0 128 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 6 Feed Gcode 4 6 1 Feed mode G64 G61 G63 Format Dwell exact stop mode G61 Tapping mode G63 Cutting mode G64 Function Dwell mode G61 Once specifi
207. he program directory page See Fig 10 2 1 PROGRAM DIR 000002 N0120 D l1 1 HARD D 0 6 2006 252 2006 11 12 2588 2006 11 12 000151 2006 11 12 000084 2006 11 12 2006 11 12 2006 11 12 4 25 s0000 T0100 EDIT L PRG MDIJECUR MODILCUR NXT DIRI Fig 10 2 1 1 Open the program Open the program specified O sequence number ENTER key or EOB key or sequence number ENTER key or EOB key In Edit mode if the sequence number input does not exist a new program will be created 2 Deletion of the program 1 Edit mode Press DEL key to delete the program where cursor locates 2 Edit mode O sequence number DEL or sequence number DEL 10 2 2 Number of the program stored The maximum number of the programs stored in this system is 400 Look up in Fig 10 2 1 above for the message on the number of the program currently stored in the program directory page 10 2 3 Memory capacity Look up in Fig 10 2 1 above for the message on memory capacity in the program directory page 10 2 4 Viewing of the program list A program directory page can display 10 CNC program names at most If the CNC programs are over 10 they can t be fully displayed in a page so press the PAGE key to display the program 244 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual names on the next page If the page key is pressed continuously all the CNC program names will be displayed by cycle on LCD Because the programs are lis
208. he programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other after they are shifted by r O indicates the center of the tool 1 Tool movement in start up When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode the tool moves as illustrated below start up a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear sLinear Linear Circular Workpiece Programmed path r offset value Tool center path Start position Tool center path Programmed path Start position r offset value 110 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual b Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 gt a290 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Linear Circular Linear linear Start position Start position Tool center path Tool center path Linear Linear ae Linear Circular Start position Start position r offset value Workpiece Programmed path Tool center path Intersection L Intersection is the position where offset paths of two successive blocks intersects 111 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual CC Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 p inear circula Linear linear Linear circular 4 S
209. hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To interpolate by the transition arc 1 from the start point 6 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by arc 2 arc 3 7 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G26 G32 Explanation In outer circle fine milling the interpolation directions of transition arc and fine milling arc are different while the interpolation direction in the instruction means the interpolation direction of the fine milling Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough milled as following by canned cycle G26 instruction 68 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 7 Y Initial level z 50 R level z 5 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G26 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J30 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the outer circle fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 Format G33 G98 G99 X YZ RL JL W_ Q V UDF K G34 Function These instructions are used for linear cutting cycle from the rectangle center by the parameter data specified till the rectangular groove programmed is machined Explanation For these instructions refer
210. ified by HOO H128 as required The value of the offset number can be stored into the offset memory in advance by LCD MDI panel The range of the offset value is as follows P m Offset value H 999 999 999 999mm The offset value corresponding to offset No 00 HOO is 0 It can t be set in the system The tool length compensation is ineffective before Z instruction Note While the offset value is changed due to the offset number changing the old offset value is replaced by the new one not the adding of the new offset value and the old one For example HO1 ceeeeeeeeeeteeeees offset value 20 PO 2 aiena offset value 30 G90 G43 Z100 HO1 _ Z to 120 G90 G43 Z100 H02 _ Z to 130 3 Sequence of the offset value 101 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Once the length offset mode is set up the current offset number takes effect at once if the offset number is changed the old offset value will be immediately replaced by the new one For example Oxxxxx H01 G43 Z10 1 Offset number H01 takes effect G44 Z20 H02 2 Offset number H02 takes effect H03 3 Offset number HO3 takes effect G49 4 Offset cancel HOO takes effect M30 4 Tool length compensation cancel Specify G49 or HOO to cancel tool length compensation And the tool length compensation is cancelled immediately after they are specified Note After B mode of tool length offset is executed along
211. igid mode specified G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restriction F Alarm is issued if the F value specified exceeds the upper limit of the cutting feedrate S Alarm is issued if the rotation speed exceeds the max speed of the gear used which is set by number parameter P294 297 Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset Before canned cycle the tool radius compensation is cancelled automatically while it is set up automatically after the canned cycle Program restart Itis ineffective during the rigid tapping 4 4 21 Canned cycle cancel G80 Format G80 Function Itis used to cancel the canned cycle Explanation All canned cycles are cancelled for normal operation Point R and point Z are cancelled too Other drilling and boring data are also cancelled Example M3 S100 Spindle running start 97 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to Reference point and cancel canned cycle M5 Spindle stops
212. imit q LR ae a 7 Reference point VM CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 Part Program Composition 2 1 Program composition A program is composed by many blocks which are formed by words The blocks are separated by the end code LF for ISO CR for EIA In this manual the end code is represented by character PROGRAM 000002 N00180 000002 N120 EOB CODE N240 G41 X100 D1 G02 X200 R50 N420 G01 YO F2500 N480 X0 N540 M30 ADD Ln 2 S0000 T0100 EDIT L PRGY MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 2 1 Program structure The set instructions to control the CNC machine tool to machine the parts are called program After the program edited is entered into the CNC system the system controls the tool to move along straight line arc or make the spindle run or stop by these instructions And the instructions should be edited by the machine actual movement sequence The program structure is shown in Fig 2 1 2 1 1 Program name In this system the system memory may store many programs In order to differentiate these programs address O with five figures behind it is headed in the beginning of the program And it is shown in Fig 2 2 o OOOOO C Program number 0 99999 heading O negligible in inputting Address O Fig 2 2 Program name composition 9 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 1 2 Sequence number and block A pr
213. in or inch min Workpiece Table Fig 7 2 1 1 Feed per minute Restriction Feed per minute mode can t be applied for some instructions such as threading 7 2 2 Feed per revolution G95 Format G95 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount in a revolution Unit mm rev or inch rev Explanation 1 After specifying G95 feed per revolution mode the feed amount of the tool per revolution is directly specified by a number after F 2 G95 is a modal code Once specified it is effective till G94 is specified 3 An override from 0 to 150 can be applied to feed per revolution with the override key on the operator panel 156 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual in ie Feed amount per spindle revolution mm rev or inch rev Fig 7 2 2 1 Feed per revolution Note Feedrate fluctuation may occur if the spindle speed is low The slower the spindle rotates the more frequently the feedrate fluctuation occurs 7 3 Tangential speed control Usually the cutting feed of the tool is made by controlling the speed along the tangent of the contour path to reach a value specified Y Y Starting point Fy End point Fy E Center End point X Linear interpolation Circular interpolation F The speed along the tangent F TA F F Fy The speed along X axis Fy The speed along Y axis Fz The speed along Z axis 7 4 Feedrate override keys The feedrate in JOG mode and AUTO mode can b
214. ion 10 1 Program edit The part program edit should be operated in Edit mode The Edit mode can be entered by pressing key Press key to enter program page then press PROG soft key to enter the program edit and modification interface as is shown in Fig 10 1 1 PROGRAM 000002 NO060 X100 N0120 XO N0180 GO1 X50 Y50 F2000 N0240 G41 X100 D1 N0300 G01 Y100 N0360 G02 X200 R50 N0420 G01 YO F2500 N0180 XO N0180 Y50 DATA Ln 2 EDIT BG EDT BG END CHECK SAVE RETURN gt Fig 10 1 1 Press P soft key to enter next page Ita REPLACE CUT copy PASTE RETURN gt J Press P soft key to enter next page lt RSTR RETURN Press lt 1 soft key to return to last page lt 4 REPLACE CUT COPY PASTE RETURN gt The replacement cut copy paste reset operations etc can be done by pressing the corresponding soft keys The switch of the program must be opened before program edit See the section 3 5 2 Parameter and program switch in this manual for its operation Note The maximun lines a program file contains are 200 000 234 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 10 1 1 Program creation 10 1 1 1 Auto creation of the sequence number Set the auto sequence number for 1 by the steps in section 3 5 1 See Fig 10 1 1 SETTING 000002 N0120 MIRROR X 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Y 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Z 0 OFF 1 ON CODE
215. ion Manual WZO 1 WZ 1 MCM 1 Macro variables input by MDI enabled Workpiece origin offset input by MDI disabled Workpiece origin offset input by MDI enabled Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell disabled Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell enabled Custom macro input by MDI MDI type Custom macro input by MDI any type Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 30 ABS MAB DPI DPI 1 Decimal point omitted in programming default mm sec 0 Decimal point omitted in programming default minimum unit MAB 1 Absolute or relative setting by parameters in MDI mode 0 Absolute or relative setting by G90 G91 in MDI mode ABS 1 Instructions regarded as absolute in MDI mode 0 Instructions regarded as incremental in MDI mode Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 14 CLR G13 Go1 c19 Gis Gi7 Got G01 1 G01 at power on or clearing 0 G00 at power on or clearing G17 1 G17 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G17 plane at power on or clearing G18 1 G18 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G18 plane at power on or clearing G19 1 G19 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G19 plane at power on or clearing G91 1 To set for G91 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G90 mode at power on or clearing G13 1 To set for G13 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G12 mo
216. ion3 Operation5 Point Z Point Z pes Spindle stop Spindle CW Spindle stop Spindle CW After positioning along X and Y axis the Z axis rapidly traverses to point R level The spindle is rotated CCW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G84 instruction When tapping is finished the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped And traverse to initial level is then performed When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods 1 Specify M29 S before a tapping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in a block that contains a tapping instruction If G84 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next tapping operation 4st If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole 94 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as
217. ition but is made by calculating the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the traverse block on the condition that cutting is not performed during traverse Therefore the constant surface cutting speed is not needed 154 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 7 Feed Functions F code The feed functions are used to control the feedrate of the tool They are used as following 7 1 Traverse G00 instruction is used for rapid positioning And the traverse speed can be set by number parameter P88 P92 Override can be applied to a traverse speed by the OVERRIDE adjusting keys on the operator panel as follows In which FO is set by number parameter P93 The acceleration of rapid positioning G0 can be set by number parameter P105 124 It can be properly set depending on the machine and the motor response Note A feedrate F instruction is ineffective even it is specified in a block containing G00 and the system performs positioning at the speed specified by GO 7 2 Cutting feedrate Feedrate of linear interpolation GO1 circular interpolation G02 G03 are specified with the numbers after F code The unit of it is mm min The tool moves by the feedrate programmed Override can be applied to feedrate using the override key on the operator panel Override range 0 150 In order to prevent mechanical vibration acceleration deceleration can be automatically applied at the beginning and
218. k Variable name 2 for operation Or a constant Significance i j o k _________ Operation sign specified by Hm Example P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 P 100 Q 101 R15 100 101 0 15 P 100 Q 100 R 102 100 100 o 102 H code specified by G65 has no effect to the offset selection Geode Heode Function Definition ess Hoz Addition i 1 Hh ces Hos Subtraction i k Multiplication i j x k Ces Ho Division i a th oe fa Logic addition OR i j OR k Logic multiplication i AND k AND Mick an AND OR i j XOR k ces H23 Compliment fi trunct Fe Compound i ix j k G65 H26 multiplication and division Compound square 7 G65 H27 i j k es er ee a ce m sre W SIN ces Hez Cosme fi COS ces Hss Tangen i jxTANGHY 140 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual E e e i ATANG Unconditional Turning N transfer aaa transfer IF j k GOTON Sona transfer IF j k GOTO N 2 Operation instruction 1 Variable assignment 1 J G65 H01 P I Q J Example G65 H01 P 201 Q1005 201 1005 G65 H01 P 201 Q 210 201 210 G65 H01 P 201 Q 202 201 202 2 Addition 1 J K G65 H02 P I Q J R K Example G65 H02 P 201 Q 202 R15 201 202 15 3 Subtraction I J K G65 H03 P I Q J R K Example G65 H03 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 203 4 M
219. key to enter the Tool Offset page 2 Move the cursor to the offset number for inputting Step 1 press page keys to display the offset page to be modified move the cursor by pressing cursor keys to locate the offset number to be modified Step 2 press SEARCH key input offset number and press key for location 3 In lt MDI gt mode input the offset value After pressing key the offset amount is computed by system automatically and displayed on LCD Note 1 During the tool offset setting the new offset value is ineffective till its offset number T code is specified Note 2 The offset value can be modified during the program execution If the value is needed to be effective during the program execution the modification must be completed before the tool offset number is used Note 3 If length offset is needed to be added the relative coordinate value of Z axis the offset value should follow Z code then it will be automatically accumulated Example If Z10 is input the offset value is the one the actual relative coordinate added by 10 3 4 2 2 Modification and setting of pitch offset 1 Set the offset value required by modifying the parameters NO 221 NO 225 2 Enter offset value for every point by sequence 3 The pitch error offset is associated with the offset interval and offset override Note Refer to Volume Four Connection of GSK218M Connection and PLC manual for the pitch setting 3 5 Setting display 3 5 1 Set
220. keys in manual rapid traverse The override for rapid traverse includes four gears FO 25 50 100 25 50 100 overrides are set by parameters No 088 092 FO override by number parameter No 093 Note 2 The rapid overrides are effective for the following speed 1 GOO rapid traverse 2 Rapid traverse in canned cycle 3 Rapid traverse in G28 4 Manual rapid traverse Example If the rapid traverse speed is 6m min and override is 50 speed is 3m min Note 3 The adjusting by override keys during the axis moving is ineffective 4 1 4 Manual intervention While a program run in Auto MDI or DNC modes shifts to JOG mode after a dwell operation the manual operation is available Move the axes manually then shift to Auto mode press key to run the program the axes traverse to the original intervention point by GOO and go on the program execution Explanation 1 If the single block is executed during the returning the tool will stop at a halt position When the cycle start is put on the running is restored 2 If alarm or resetting occurs during the manual intervention or returning this function will be cancelled 3 Don t use machine lock mirror image scaling functions during manual intervention 4 Processing and workpiece figure should be taken into consideration to prevent tool or machine damage prior to manual intervention The manual intervention operation is shown in the following figure 212 CGS I HI GSK218MCNC
221. l to tool radius compensation And the circular interpolation GO2 G03 is impermitted C Switching of tool radius compensation The offset direction is usually changed from the left to the right or vice versus via offset cancel mode But the positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 can be changed directly not via offset cancel mode and the tool path is as follows New vector I J Gay Tool center path le 7 a fean g 344 New vector Programmed Old path yector Programmed path Old vector GiG41D_X_Y_ G42D_X_Y_s GiG42D_X_Y_ G41D_ xX _Y_ D The change of offset value The change of offset value is usually performed at the tool change in offset cancel mode but for the positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 it can also be performed in offset mode It is shown as follows O vector Tool center path gt x Y Tool e New vector Programmed path Programmed path Old vector The change of offset value E The positive and negative offset value and the tool center path 107 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual If the offset value is set for negative it is equivalent to change the G41 and G42 in program that the outer cutting for workpiece turns into inner cutting and inner cutting for outer cutting In the following programming figure the offset value is assumed for positive When a tool path is programmed as A and the offset value is set for nega
222. lassified for 16 gears can be selected by pressing keys The feedrate override ascends for a gear 5 till 150 each time the 5 key is pressed The feedrate override descends for a gear 5 till 0 each time the uh key is pressed Note F value in feedrate override program The actual federate F value specified X feedrate override During auto running the rapid traverse speed can be selected by pressing a Oe sa Sf key The 4 gears override of FO 25 50 100 are available for the rapid traverse Note The rapid traverse speed value overriden by rapid override and number parameters No 088 No 089 No 090 can be obtained by following equation The actual rapid traverse speed of X axis the value set by parameter No 088 X rapid override 226 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual If the override is FO the axis stop is set by bit parameter No 12 4 If it is set for non stop O the actual rapid traverse speed is set by number parameter No 093 for all axes The actual rapid traverse speed of Y or Z axis is as above 7 10 Spindle override in auto run In auto run the spindle speed can be overriden if it is controlled by analog quantity The spindle speed can be _ overriden by pressing spindle override keys Lorat LA in auto mode which are classified for 16 gears from 0 150 The spindle override ascends for a gear 5 till 150 each time the key is pressed The spindle overri
223. llaneous function is on its indicator lights up and M S T functions are ineffective lf it is on its indicator lights up and the axis output is ineffective For machine working light on off For machine lubrication on off For coolant on off Chip removal switch For adjustment of the feedrate For rapid traverse on off For rapid override manual single step MPG override selection 167 GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode JOG mode DNC mode Any mode Any mode Any mode Any mode Auto mode MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode JOG mode DNC mode Any mode Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode JOG mode DNC mode CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual For Machine zero MPG positive negative mode Step mode JOG moving of X Y Z mode Manual 4 axis in JOG feeding keys Step mode and the positive direction of the axis is by MPG Alarm occuring if JOG mode machine reaches the hard limit Overtravel pressing this key release key with indicator lighting up to move reversely till the indicator gone out Cursor moving to Auto mode MDI the beginning of DNC mode the starting block to restart the machine also for rapid program check Progra
224. m Restart key Auto mode MDI DNC mode Optional Stop For stop of the key program with M01 Auto running stops Auto mode MDI Feed Hold key by pressing this DNC mode key Auto running Auto mode MDI mode Cycle Start key begins by pressing DNC mode this key 168 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 2 System Power On Off and Safety Operations 2 1 System power on Before this GSK218M is powered on ensure that 1 The machine is normal 2 The voltage of the power supply conforms to the requirement of the machine 3 The wiring is correct and reliable The current position relative is displayed after system normalty check and initiation are finished ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000002 N00000 16 0000 16 0000 96 0000 PRG SPEED 0 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 y EREL ABS ALL MONI 2 2 System power off Before power is off ensure that 1 The X Y Z axis of the CNC is at halt 2 Miscellaneous functions spindle pump etc are off 3 CNC power is cut off prior to cutting off machine power Check the following items before power off 1 The LED indicating the cycle start on the operator panel is off 2 All the movable parts of the CNC machine tool is at halt 3 Press POWER OFF button to turn off the power Cut off power
225. m occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 14 Boring cycle G85 Format G85 X_Y_Z_R_F_K_ Function It is used to bore a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R F Cutting feedrate Number of repeats G85 G98 G85 G99 Tr Point R level Point R Point Z 86 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual After positioning along X and Y axis traverse is performed to point R level and boring is performed from point R level to point Z level As the tool reaches the hole bottom cutting feed is performed then return to point R level Before specifying G85 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G85 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis s
226. m par 0066 bit par 0012 0014 num par 0086 bit par 0015 0017 num par 0105 P 1 5 S0000 T0000 EDIT COPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO gt Fig 3 10 5 The function parameter settings are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in it if you are unfamiliar with some parameter settings 208 CGSR Fr Hist 5 MACRO interface GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual In lt INDEX gt page press MACRO soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 6 INDEX INFO MACROINSTRUCTION 000001 N00000 G65 H M P I Q J R K M HI J K H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H11 H12 P 1 4 01 99 operation instruction operation result var seq alarm operand 1 variable invariable operand 2 variable invariable I J HI H J HK I J K I J K I H J K I J or K I1 J and K S0000 T0000 OPRT ALARM G CODE K PARA Fig 3 10 6 The MACRO format and operation instructions are introduced in this page the local variables common variables and the system setting range are also shown in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in it if you are unfamiliar with the macro instruction operations 6 PLCADDR interface page as is shown in Fig 3 10 7 In lt INDEX gt page press PLCADDR soft key to enter this INDEX INFO PLC ADDRESS 000001 N00000 MEANING SYMBOL ADDRESS Feed pause alar
227. m resets If the alarm is cancelled the tool can move forward or backword freely 7 G13 changed by G12 in forbidden area the following results may occur if G13 changed by G12 in forbidden area 1 If the forbidden area is interior one an alarm will be issued for next move 2 If the forbidden area is exterior one an alarm will be issued immediately 175 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 Interface Display as well as Data Modification and Setting 3 1 Position display 3 1 1 Four types of position display Press key to enter the position page that includes four types REL LABS AII MONI They can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys as is shown in the following 1 Relative mode It displays the coordinate of the current tool in relative coordinate system by pressing REL soft key called relative in following see Fig 3 1 1 ACT POS CRELATIVE 000001 005492 000014 N00000 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 56 0000 PRG SPEED 500 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 500 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PART CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 CUT TIME 000 00 00 iede Sx 100 S00000 T0010 MDI RELI ABS ALL MONI Fig 3 1 1 Clearing steps of relative coordinate system press lt X gt key as X axis blinks press lt CANCEL gt key to clear the coordinate system and the same for Y and Z axes Setup steps of relative coordinate system press lt X gt key as X axis
228. m signal SPL FOOO 4 Cycle start alarm signal STL FOOO 5 Servo ready signal SA FOOO 6 Automatic run signal OP FOOO 7 Alarm signal AL FO01 0 Reset signal RST FOO1 1 Spindle speed inpos sig F001 3 Spindle enabling signal ENB F001 4 Tapping signal TAP F001 5 Canceling rigid tap sig D TAP F001 6 Inch input signal INCH F002 0 Rapid feedrate signal RPDO F002 1 Ln 1 319 S0000 T0000 EDIT lt 41 PLCADDR CALCULA Fig 3 10 7 The PLC addresses signs meanings are introduced in this page you may find the corresponding introduction in it if you are unfamiliar with the PLC addresses 7 CALCULA interface In the 2 page of lt INDEX gt interface press CALCULA soft key to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 10 8 209 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 000001 N00000 INPUT 0000 T0000 MDI lt lt PLCADDR CALCULA Fig 3 10 8 The operation formats of addition subtraction multiplication division sine cosine extraction are shown in this interface The cursor may be moved to the space for inputting and press lt ENTER gt key for confirmation After the data input is completed the system will calculates ous automatically and input the result to the space behind the sign 210 CGiSR I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 Manual Operation The JOG mode that contains JOG feed spindle control and machine panel contr
229. me constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction 0 Not use the same time constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction OVU 1 10 retraction override for rigid tapping 0 1 retraction override for rigid tapping OV3 1 Spindle speed effective by program instruction 0 Spindle speed ineffective by program instruction Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 04 6 ORI ssoG DGN DGN 1 Difference of the spindle and the tapping axis errors 270 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual SSOG ORI Synch error in rigid tapping For servo spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping For following spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping To perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts Not perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 7 SCR xSC SCLz SCLy SCLx RIN RIN 1 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by G90 G91 instruction 0 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by absolute instruction SCLx 1 X axis scaling effective 0 X axis scaling ineffective SCLy 1 Y axis scaling effective 0 Y axis scaling ineffective SCLz 1 Z axis scaling effective 0 Z axis scaling ineffective XSC 1 Each axis scaling mirror effective 0 Each axis scaling mirror ineffective SCR 1 Scaling override unit 0
230. meaning Coordinate selection set drawing plane that has 6 types as shown in the next line Graphic mode set graphic display mode Scaling set drawing ratio Graphic center set the coordinate of the LCD center in workpiece coordinate system The maximum and minimum value The scaling and the graphic center are automatically set when the maximum and minimum value of the axis are set Maximum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Maximum value of Y axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of Y axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Maximum value of Z axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm Minimum value of Z axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics unit 0 001mm B The graphic parameters setting steps a Move the cursor to the parameter to be set b Key in the value desired 197 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual c Press key to confirm it 2 Graphic page Press GRAPH soft key to enter this page See Fig 3 6 2 GRAPH DRAW S START T STOP MDI KG PARA SWITCH START STOP ERASE Fig 3 6 2 The figure machined can be monitored in graphic page S A Press key or START soft key to enter the DRAW START mode then the sign is headed to S START T B Press ke
231. ment along straight line b Movement along arc G01 Y__ G03X Y R y X axis Interpolation Motor a Y axis 7 a Movement Motor along straight line b Movement along arc Note For some machines it is the worktable moving other than tool moving in practice It is assumed that the tool moves relative to the workpiece in this manual Refer to the machine actual movement direction in practice to protect against personnel hurt and machine damage 1 2 Feed Feed function The feedrate specification is called feed function mm min F g Workpiece To specify a speed to machine the part by tool is called feed and the machine speed is instructed by a numerical value For example the program instruction is F150 if tool feeds by 150mm min CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 3 Cutting feedrate spindle speed function Tool Tool diameter Dmm V Cutting speed m min Workpiece The speed of tool relative to workpiece in cutting is called cutting feedrate It can be instructed by spindle speed RPM r min by CNC Example If the tool diameter is 10mm cutting linear speed is 8 m min the spindle speed is about 255RPM according to N 1000V mD so the instruction is S255 Instructions related to spindle speed are called spindle speed function 1 4 Operation instruction miscellaneous function When the workpiece is to be machined to make the spindle run an
232. mergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 6 c15 c14 c13 c12 c11 c10 co9 cos C08 1 To clear G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop c09 1 To clear G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop C10 1 Toclear G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop C11 To clear G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop C12 1 Toclear G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop C13 1 To clear G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop C14 1 To clear G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop C15 1 Toclear G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop To reserve G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop 267 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 7 WDIR SCRW SCRW 1 To perform pitch compensation 0 Not perform pitch compensation WDIR 1 Pitch co
233. milled as following by canned cycle G37 instruction G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G37 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 F800 Canned cycle starts and go downward to the bottom to perform the rectangular groove fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 7 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 Format G73 X_Y_Z R_Q F_K_ Function This cycle is especially defined for high speed peck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole by rapid retraction The operation illustration is shown as Fig 4 4 1 1 Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R i Depth of cut for each cutting feed F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 74 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G73 G98 G73 G99 Initial level Fig 4 4 1 1 Z R The hole bottom parameter Z and R must be correctly specified while performing the 1 drilling operation omitting unallowable or the alarm is issued Q If parameter Q is specified the intermittent feed is performe
234. modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal datum If tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M4 S100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G74 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning tap hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning tap hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning tap hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning tap hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning tap hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 13 Fine boring cycle G76 Format G76 X_Y_ZQRP_FK_ Function It is used for boring a hole precisely When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops and the tool departs from the machined surface of the workpiece and retracts The
235. move by instruction will be located in the new workpiece coordinate system for the coordinate of the axis not move it turns to the corresponding coordinate in the new workpiece coordinate 35 CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual system and the actual machine position doesn t alter e g The corresponding machine coordinate for G54 coordinate system origin is 10 10 10 The corresponding machine coordinate for G55 coordinate system origin is 30 30 30 When the program is executed by sequence the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate of the end point are shown as follows Program Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate GO G54 X50 Y50 250 50 50 50 60 60 60 G55 X100 Y100 100 100 70 130 130 60 X120 280 120 100 80 150 130 110 5 The external workpiece zero offset or workpiece zero offset can be altered by G10 which is shown as following By instruction G10L2 Pp X_Y_Z_ P 0 External workpiece zero offset P 1to6 Workpiece zero offset of workpiece coordinate system from 1 to 6 XYZ For absolute instruction G90 itis workpiece zero offset of each axis For incremental instruction G91 it is workpiece zero offset set plusing each axis the result is the new workpiece zero offset By G10 instruction each coordinate system can be altered respectively Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate system 1 G5
236. moving in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 299 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0317 Position error limit of spindle moving in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 0318 Error limit at tapping axis stopping in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 0319 Error limit at spindle stopping in rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 0320 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 1st gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0321 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 2nd gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0322 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 3rd gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0323 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 1st gear 1 Setting range 1 256 0324 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 2nd gear 1 Setting range 1 256 0325 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 3rd gear 1 Setting range 1 256 0326 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD ist 1 gear Setting range 1 256 0327 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 2nd 1 gear Setting range 1 256 0328 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 3rd 1 gear Setting range 1 256 0329 Rotational angle with no rotational angle specified in coordinate rotation Setting range 0 9999 9999 300 CGSB I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0330 Scaling with no scaling specified Setting range 0 9999 9999 0331 Scalin
237. mpensation selection unidirectional 0 Pitch compensation selection bidirectional Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 03 8 PG2 PG1 SAR SAR 1 To detect the spindle speed in position signal 0 Not detect the spindle speed in position signal PG2 PG1 Gear ratio of spindle and position encoder 00 for 1 1 01 for 2 1 10 for 4 1 11 for 8 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 03 9 Evo EVR TLC TLC 1 Tool length compensation type B 0 Tool length compensation type A EVR 1 Offset changed effective by respecifying D in tool radius offset 0 Offset changed effective in next block in tool radius offset EVO 1 Offset changed effective by respecifying H in tool length compensation 0 Offset changed effective in next block in tool length compensation Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 40 oDi CCN SUP SUP 1 Start up type in tool radius compensation B 0 Start up type in tool radius compensation A CCN 1 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and cancel compensation in tool radius compensation 0 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and reserve compensation in tool 268 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual radius compensation ODI 1 Tool radius compensation value set by diameter 0 Tool radius compensation value set by r
238. n a section of program 0 Only one M code allowable in a section of program Standard setting 1001 0000 System parameter number 03 4 CFH DWL DWL 1 G04 for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode 0 G04 not for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode CFH 1 To clear F H D codes at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve F H D codes at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 266 CGSGR I HSU System parameter number GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 3 5 co7 coe cos co4 co3 co2 cor C01 1 To clear G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop C02 1 Toclear G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop C03 1 To clear G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop C04 1 Toclear G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop C05 1 Toclear G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop C06 1 Toclear G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop C07 1 Toclear G codes of 07 group at reset or e
239. n program 2 Fora two digit S code the latter two digits are effective if S code is specified with 151 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual a four digit number 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 Format Constant surface speed control instruction G96 S_ Surface speed m min or feet min Constant surface speed control cancel instruction G97 S_ Spindle speed rmp Constant surface speed controlled axis instruction G96 Pn P1 Xaxis P2Y axis P3 Z axis P4 4 axis Max spindle speed clamping G92 S_ S specifies the max spindle speed rmp Function The number following S is used to specify the surface speed relative speed of tool and workpiece The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the tool position Explanation 1 G96 is a modal instruction After it is specified the program enters the constant surface speed control mode and the S value specified is assumed as a surface speed 2 A G96 instruction must specify the axis along which constant surface speed control is applied It can be cancelled by G97 instruction 3 To execute the constant surface speed control it is necessary to set the workpiece coordinate system and the coordinate value at the center of the rotary axis becomes zero Fig 6 1 1 Workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control 4 When constant surface speed control is applied if a spindle speed higher than the value s
240. nd Operation Manual ii Arc center coincides with the start point or end point G41 N5 G01 X100 0 N6 G02 X100 0 I0 JO Tool center path N7 G03 Y 100 0 J 100 0 r As the figure shows alarm is issued and NS the control stops at the end of last block Programmed path 4 Tool movement in offset cancel mode In offset mode when the block complies to any of the following condition is executed the system enters offset cancell mode The operation of this block is called offset cancel a Instruction G40 b When the tool radius compensation number is 0 Arc instruction G03 or G02 is unallowed in offset cancel mode Alarm is issued and tool stops if arc is specified a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 i Linear Linear il Circular Linear Too center path Programmed path Tool center path 114 CGSB I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual b Tool movement around an inner side of a corner 90 lt a lt 180 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which is set by bit parameter No 40 0 Linear linear Circular linear Programmed path Programmed path Tool center path Tool center path f GE Linear Linear Circular Linear Workpiece Programmed path Too center path P L intersection Intersection Programmed path Tool center path Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute e a a lt 90 ne are 2 tool
241. ne The machine uses these signals to turn on or off these functions Usually only one M code can be specified in a block In some cases up to three M codes can be specified in a block by bit parameter No 33 7 Some M codes can t be specified simultaneously for the restrictions of the mechanical operation See the machine manual by the builder for the restrictions to specify multiple M codes for the same block in mechanical operation 5 1 M codes controlled by PLC If an M code controlled by PLC is in a same block with a move instruction they are executed simultaneously 5 1 1 Forward and reverse rotation instructions M03 M04 Instruction M3 M4 Sxxx Explanation Viewed from the positive Z axis to negative the spindle counterclockwise CCW rotation is defined as forward rotation clockwise CW as reverse rotation The instruction of Sx x x specifies the spindle speed it is the gear in gear mode Unit r min When it is controlled by frequency converter Sx x x specifies the actual speed e g 1000 specifies the spindle to rotate by a speed of 1000r min 147 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 1 2 Spindle stop M05 Instruction M5 When M5 is executed in auto mode the spindle stops but the speed specified by S instruction is reserved The deceleration at spindle stop is set by the machine builder It is usually by energy consumption brake 5 1 3 Cooling on and off M08 M09 Instruction M8 M9 It
242. neaeeeeeeeetees 95 4 4 21 Canned cycle cancel G80 c cccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesencaeeseeeeeseteeneaees 97 4 5 Tool compensation G COdGC cccccceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeesetenseieeeeeeeeeees 100 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 oo eceeeceeeeseeesseesseeseeeeeeeeeneeeees 100 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 eee ceeccccecee cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeaeeeeeeeess 103 4 5 3 Explanation of tool radius compensation cccccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenes 109 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 eeccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeteeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 126 4 5 5 Tool offset value and number input by program G10 eeeeeeteeteeeetees 128 VI CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 40 Feed G COGS nrar EE A aE EA E EE E E 129 4 6 1 Feed mode G64 G61 G63 ccc ceecceccccce cece eeeceeee cece eeeeeecceeeeaeeeeeeeeseeceneaeeeeeeeesseeas 129 4 6 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 oe eecceceececeeeeceeeeeeeteeseeeeeeteneeeeees 130 4T Macro G COdG soio AE aa AKERE EAGEN 132 ATA CUStOM MACO eror a E E OE eee 132 Ald Macro variable Sersan eE EEA KEENAN AEE EEEE EAEE 132 4 7 3 Custom macro Call cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseee sees sees eees sees sees sees sees seeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee ees 139 4 7 4 Operation and transfer instruction ceccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeteteenae
243. necsensneesesneneecensunenceusuanecscuseneeeessaneenssenaaneasenaaneecenasneeeeessceeenenanees 222 7 1 Selection of the auto run programS ccceeceeceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeieaeeeeeeeeteeeeeas 222 T2 AUO PUM Stassi or iioa aisinas 222 3 AUO TUN Sto Dio eea ae ee ee ee 223 7 4 Auto running from an arbitrary block 0 ccceececeece cece cece eeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeesenceneeeeeeeeeeseneees 224 TO Dy TUM aa R as a e Aea e ue de deve ee 224 7 6 Single lock UNNNG isses e s aas aia aneia tant blouses 225 7 7 Running with machine lOCK cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 225 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 8 Running with MeS TdlOGkK ierre dates siteesdae yan arctan Nerea VENNE E eee 226 7 9 Feedrate and rapid override in auto run ecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeess 226 7 10 Spindle override in auto run ccc cece eececece cece ceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeecceeeaeeeeeeeesenceeeaeeeeeeeeteeeeeas 227 FAL Cooling CONTION siirteen anasa tatea a n Saena eee 227 7 12 Background edit in auto run eee cece cece cette eee e eter eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeees 227 8 MIDE Operation csc cceccisiccteeer cise aa aaraa a aaaea a aA aae aE AEE Era kanna 229 8 1 MDIiinstructions INpuls ieie ea aas e ea aotr A 229 8 2 Run and stop of MDI instructions sssseeeneeeeeseeetrrre eeeeeeeeceec
244. ner corner during tool radius compensation override is applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress the amount of cutting per unit of time to get a good surface finish Explanation 1 When the tool moves along an inner corner and inner arc area during tool radius compensation it decelerates automatically to reduce the load of the tool to get a smooth surface 2 When G62 is specified and the tool path with tool radius compensation forms an inner corner the feedrate is automatically overriden at both ends of the corner There are four types of inner corners as shown in Fig 4 6 2 1 In figure 2 lt lt Op lt 178 Op is set by number parameter P144 1 Linear linear Q Tool 2 Linear circular Programmed path ae alee oie Tool center path 4 Circular circular Fig 4 6 2 1 3 When a corner is determined to be an inner corner the feedrate is overriden before and after the inner corner The Ls and Le where the feedrate is overriden are 130 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual distances from points on the tool center path to the corner Fig 4 6 2 2 where Ls Les2mm Programmed path Le Ls lia Tool center path T The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 6 2 2 Straight line to straight line 4 When a programmed path consists of two arcs the feedrate is overriden if the start and end points are in the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants Fig 4 6
245. ng control Setting range 0 2000 mm s Forecasting control S type _ pre acceleration 400 0135 deceleration time constant Setting range 0 400 ms 0136 Setting range 0 400 ms 0137 Setting range 0 400 ms 0138 Linear time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Exponential time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Exponential acceleration deceleration FL speed of 0 cutting feed in forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0139 Contour control precision in forecasting control 0 01 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0140 Blocks merged in forecasting control Setting range 0 10 287 CGSR I Hist 0141 Setting range 0 0 5 m 0142 Length condition of circular formation in forecasting control Setting range 0 30 In position precision in forecasting control GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 05 m 0143 Angular condition of circular formation in forecasting 0 control Setting range 0 30 0144 Critical angle of the two blocks during automatic corner deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 2 178 mm min 0145 Minimum feedrate of automatic corner deceleration 420 in forecasting control Setting range 10 1000 0146 Axis error allowable for speed difference deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 60 1000 0147 Cutting precision grade in forecasting control Setting range
246. ng or corner rounding can t be used in DNC operation 8 The chamfering and corner rounding value can t be negative or alarm is issued 54 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 3 Reference point G code The reference point is a fixed point on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference point return function There are 3 instructions for reference point as is shown in Fig 4 3 1 1 the tool can be automatically moved to the reference point via an intermediate point along an axis specified by G28 or from the reference point automatically to a specified point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G29 3 R Reference position 2 B intermediate point A return to the start point S C return to target point from of reference position reference position Fig 4 3 1 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 Format G28 X_Y_Z_ Function It is used for the operation to return to the reference point a special point on machine via an intermediate point Explanation Intermediate point An intermediate point is specified by an instruction parameter in G28 which can be expressed by absolute or incremental instructions During the execution of this block the coordinate value of the intermediate point of the axis specified is stored that is to be used for the G29 returning from the reference point instruction Note The coordinate value of the intermediate
247. ng range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0022 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0023 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0024 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 2 G55_ 5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0025 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0026 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 277 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0027 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0028 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0029 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0030 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0031 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0032 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 _Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0033 Origin offse
248. ng to the specified point via the intermediate point specified by G30 from the reference point Explanation 1 X_Y_Z_ Instruction for specifying the intermediate point absolute incremental 2 The specification and restriction for G30 instruction is the same as G28 instruction See number parameter P50 64 for the 2 3 4 reference point setting 3 The G30 code can also be used together with G29 code return from reference point whose setting and restriction are identical with G28 code 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 Format G29 X_Y_Z_ Function It is used for the operation of returning to a specified point via the intermediate point specified by G28 G30 from the reference point or current point Explanation 1 The action of the G29 block can be analyzed as following refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point point R point B specified by G28 G30 from the reference point at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to a specified point from the intermediate point point B point C at a traverse speed 2 G29 is a non modal instruction which is only effective in current block Usually return from reference point should be specified immediately after G28 G30 instruction 3 The optional parameters X Y and Z in G29 instruction are used for specifying the target point i e point C in Fig 4 3 1 1 from the reference point which can be expressed by absolute or incremental instruction The instruction specifie
249. nitial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R i Dwell time F_ Cutting feedrate G84 G98 G84 G99 Initial level sa ae Spindle CW ae eee se Spindle CW fP Point R level Point Z Spindle CCW Spindle CCW CGS I HI GSK218MCNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle CW when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle is rotated reversely for retraction This operation creates threads Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the return operation is finished Before specifying G84 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CW rotation is not specified it will be adjusted for CW rotation automatically in R level by the current spindle specification If G84 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation 14 hole If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the P is a modal instruction and the min value of it is set by number parameter P281 the max value by P282 If P value is less than the setting by P281 the min value is used if P value is more than the setting by P282 the max value is used If P is specified in a block containing no drilling it can t be stored as a modal
250. ntion should be paid that the width of T1 usually not less than 25mm must ensure the deceleration completion from the zero return speed to the speed FL set by interface at the parameter No 99 the width of T2 should be more than the measuring same time diameter of the switch T3 is the zero in position point The approach switch is NPN normal close type i e The intervals of T1 and T3 are in break off state The int rvals of T2 and others are through switch signal is sent to GSK218M deceleration zero Machine zero type of GSK218M system A 231 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Zero return type using stepper motor with no encoder B Machine zero return direction Tongue fixed on the slider NPN NC Explanation approach As the system performs the machine zero return operation The machine slider moves negatively If the tongue presses down the stroke switch the system slows down Attention should be paid that the width usually not less than 25mm of the tongue should ensure the deceleration completion from zero return speed to the speed FL set by parameter No 99 as the stroke switch detaches the tongue the system stops immediately to complete zero return Machine zero type of GSK218M system B switch The approach switch signal is sent to GSK218M deceleration zero interface at the same time 9 2 Steps for machine zero 1 Press
251. ntrolled by handwheel press _ key then X axis can be moved by rotating the handwheel See Fig 6 1 2 218 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00000 18 8500 16 0000 96 0000 WHEEL INC 0 100 G00 G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PRT CNT 0000 0000 RAPID OVRD 100 RUN TIME 00 00 00 10 06 00 Sx 1 00 S0000 T0100 MDI RELI ABS IALL IMONI Fig 6 1 2 The MPG feed direction is decided by the handwheel rotation direction See details in the machine builder s manual Usually the CW of handwheel is the positive feed CCW for negative feed 6 1 3 Explanation of MPG feed 1 The relation of the handwheel scale and the machine moving amount are as following table Moving amount of a handwheel scale MPG increment 0 001 0 01 0 1 mm Machine moving amount mm 0 001 0 01 0 1 2 The value in the table varies with the mechanical transmission See details in the machine builder s manual 3 The speed of the handwheel rotated should be less than 5 r s If not there may be inconsistent between the scale and the moving amount 6 2 Control in MPG interruption 6 2 1 MPG interruption operation MPG interruption operation can be overlapped with the automatic movement in Auto mode 219 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool position during Z Tool p
252. ode if G16 is specified the workpiece coordinate system origin is regarded as the polar coordinate system origin Specified position Specified position Radius Actual position Actual position When the angle is specified When the angle is specified with an absolute instruction with an incremental instruction 2 In G91 incremental mode if G16 is specified the current point is regarded as the polar coordinate system origin Example Bolt hole circle the workpiece coordinate system zero point set as the polar coordinate system origin selecting X Y plane The zero point of the work coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system The XY plane is selected To specify angle and radius by absolute value G17 G90 G16 To specify polar coordinate system and take the workpiece coordinate system zero point in X Y plane as the polar coordinate system origin G81 X100 0 Y30 0 Z 20 0 R 5 0 F200 0 To specify 100mm distance and 30 angle Y150 To specify 100mm distance and 150 angle Y270 To specify 100mm distance and 270 angle G15 G80 To cancel the polar coordinate system To specify angle by incremental value polar radius by absolute value 42 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G17 G90 G16 To specify the polar coordinate system and take the workpiece coordinate system zero point in X Y plane as the polar coordinate system origin G81 X100 0 Y30 0 Z 20 0
253. of Z axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0219 Pitch error compensation number of 4TH axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0220 Pitch error compensation number of 5TH axis 293 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual reference point Setting range 0 9999 0221 Pitch error compensation points of X axis 256 Setting range 0 1000 0222 Pitch error compensation points of Y axis 256 Setting range 0 1000 0223 Pitch error compensation points of Z axis 256 Setting range 0 1000 0224 Pitch error compensation points of 4TH axis 256 Setting range 0 1000 0225 Pitch error compensation points of 5TH axis 256 Setting range 0 1000 0226 Pitch error compensation interval of X axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0227 Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0228 Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0229 Pitch error compensation interval of 4TH axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0230 Pitch error compensation interval of 5TH axis Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0 001 0231 Pitch error compensation override of X axis Setting range 0 99 9999 0232 Pitch error compensation override of Y axis 0 001 Setting range 0 99 9999 0 001 0233 Pitch error compensation override of Z axis Setting range 0 99 9999 294 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0 001 0234 Pitch error comp
254. ogram directory page press lt PROGRAM gt key to enter the program page press lt DIR gt soft key to display the U disk programs Move the cursor to select the processing program then press lt ENTER gt key to open this program and press lt CYCLE START gt key to execute the DNC processing 11 2 5 U disk system exit 1 Pull out U disk as the indicator for U disk doesn t blink 2 Press RETURN soft key to return to DATA soft page in lt SETTING gt page 11 2 6 Remarks for U disk model Due to the variation of models and drive chips for U disk in market this CNC system is incapable of identifying all U disks at present So the U disks shown in the following table are usable via test for this CNC system but others not shown are untested Company Model Product standard Capacity Chip Tsinghua e era Mini USB2 0 128M Lenovo T108 USB2 0 128M Lenovo B210 USB2 0 256M Lenovo USB2 0 256M Manna USB2 0 128M Aigo Special USB2 0 1G BD USB1 1 32M OTi006808 252 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual APPENDIX 1 GSK218M PARAMETER LIST Explanation The parameters are classified as following patterns according to the data type 4 data types and data value range Data type Effective data range Oor1 Axis 127 127 Byte Sign is not used in some parameters Word axis 0 255 Motd 32767 32767 Sign is not used in some parameters Wo
255. ogram is consisted by many instructions and an instruction unit is called block see Fig 2 1 The blocks are separated by program end code see Fig 2 1 In this manual the block end code is represented by character Address N with 4 figures sequence number behind it can be used at the beginning of the block see Fig 2 1 and the leading zero can be omitted The sequence of the sequence number insertion set by bit parameter No 0 5 can be arbitrary and the intervals between them can be inequal set by Parameter P210 Sequence number can be either in all blocks or in some important blocks But by common machining sequence the number should be arranged by ascending That the sequence number is placed in important part of the program is for convenience e g in tool changing or worktable indexed to a new plane 2 1 3 Instruction word Word is a factor to block composition It is formed by an address and figures behind it sometimes added before figures X 1000 Address Number Word Fig 2 3 Word composition The address is a character from English alphabetic table which defines the meaning of the figure behind it In this system the usable addresses and their meaning as well as value range are shown as Table2 1 Sometimes an address has a different meaning for different preparatory function If 2 or more identical addresses appear in an instruction the alarm for it will be set by parameter NO 32 6 Table 2 1 A
256. ol can be JOG entered by pressing key 4 1 Coordinate axis movement In JOG mode the 3 axes can be moved by JOG feed or manual rapid traverse separately 4 1 1 Manual feed X axis can be moved to positive or negative direction by pressing and holding the or key in Feed Axis and Direction Selection area If the key is released the X axis movement stops And the feedrate can be overriden to change the feed rate that of the Y and Z axes are the same as X axis The three axes simultaneous moving are not available in this system but the simultaneous zeroing of three axes is supported by the system Note The axis JOG feedrate is set by parameter No 098 the manual rapid traverse is set by parameters No 088 No 092 4 1 2 Manual rapid traverse Press _ RAPID key till the indicator for rapid traverse on panel lights up Then press manual RAPID key each axis will traverse rapidly Note 1 The manual rapid speeds are set by the parameter No 088 092 Note 2 The effective manual rapid traverse before reference return is set by the bit parameter No 12 0 4 1 3 JOG feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection The manual feedrate override classified for 16 gears 0 150 is available in JOG feed by pressing uii or Vui key for selection Note 1 There is an error of 3 for the overrides 211 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual a Be aa OF The traverse speed can be selected by pressing aU Si i
257. ollowing program GO X100 Y100 rapid positioning to the location X100 Y100 X20 Y30 rapid positioning to the location X120 Y30 GO specified by mode can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 interpolate to location X50 Y50 by straight line with the feedrate 300mm min GO G1_ X100 interpolate to location X100 Y50 by straight line with the feedrate 300mm min G1 Z50 F300 are all specified by mode and can be omitted GO X0 YO rapid positioning to the location X0 YO The initial state is the default state after the system power on See table 4 1 gt For following program 000001 X100 Y100 rapid positioning to the location X100 Y100 GO is the initial state G1 X0 YO F100 interpolate to location XO YO by straight line with the feedrate 100mm min G98 is the initial power on state Non modal means that the relevant address value is effective only in the block contains this address if it is used in following blocks it must be respecified e g G functional instructions of 00 group in Table 4 1 Refer to Table 3 4 for mode and non modal description for functional word Table 3 4 Mode and non modal for functional instruction A group of G functions that can be cancelled by each other once executed they are effective till they are cancelled by other G functions in the same group A group of M functions that can be cancelled by each other once executed they are effective till they are cancelled by other G functions in the same group
258. on Except the input modification offset operations in MDI mode the MDI running function is also available in this system By this function the instructions can be input directly for execution The input modification offset operations etc are introduced in Chapter 3 Page display as well as data modification and setting This chapter will describe the MDI running function in MDI mode 8 1 MDI instructions input The input in MDI mode is classified for two types 1 By MDI type multiple blocks can be input continuously 2 By CUR MOD type only one block can be input The input in MDI is identical with the program input in Edit mode see Chapter 10 Program Edit in this manual for details The CUR MOD input is introduced as following Example To input a block G00 X50 Y100 in CUR MOD page the steps are 1 Press key to enter the MDI mode 2 Press key to enter the Program page press CUR MOD soft key to enter the CUR MOD page see Fig 8 1 1 3 Key in the block GOOX50Y100 by sequence and press key to confirm then the block will be displayed on the page see Fig 8 1 1 PROGRAM CURRENT MODAL 000002 N0120 CURRENT MODAL GO X 50 G00 F 1000 Y 100 G17 S 1000 Z G90 M 30 A G94 T 0000 B G54 H 0000 R G21 D 0000 7 a ABSOLUTE x efi X 0 0000 P G98 Y 0 0000 Q G15 Z 0 0000 F G50 L S G69 SPRM 02500 i ee SMAX 100000 DATA s0000 T0100 MDI K PRG MDI K CUR MODJI CUR NXTILDIR
259. on doesn t result in the axis movement Explanation G92 floating coordinate system 1 x Machine zero 7 Machine coordinate origin Fig 4 2 11 1 1 As the figure shows the origin of the G92 floating coordinate system is the value in machine coordinate system which is irrelevant to the workpiece coordinate system it can be set up after the machine zero return G92 setting is effective in the following conditions 1 Before system power off 2 Before workpiece coordinate system is called 3 Before machine zero return The G92 floating coordinate system is usually used for the alignment of temporary workpiece machining and it will be lost after the power is off And G92 is usually used at the program beginning or specified in MDI mode before the program auto run 2 There are two methods for defining the floating coordinate system 1 By tool nose 39 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual zZ Fig 4 2 11 2 As fig 4 2 11 2 shows for G92 X25 3 Z23 take the position the tool locates at as the point X25 3 Z23 in the floating coordinate system 2 By a fixed point in the arbor as a basic point Basic point 1200 4 5 600 x Fig 4 2 11 3 As Fig 4 2 11 3 shows specify the workpiece coordinate system by block G92 X600 Y1200 by a basic point in the arbor as a start point Regarding a basic point as the start point if the motion is specified by the absolute v
260. or reference point return 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0185 Axes grid reference point offset amount 0 0000 Setting range 0 9999 9999 mm 0186 Alarm time for abnormal load detection 500 Setting range 0 9999 0186 Alarm time for abnormal load detection 500 Setting range 0 9999 0189 Reverse precision by backlash compensation 0 0100 Setting range 0 0001 1 0000 mm Set a p 189 x 0 0001 in reverse feeding if the feeding of single servo period is over a the backlash compensation begins Therefore in machining outer circle contour with a larger radius in order to make the offset position not to exceed the quardrant it needs to set a smaller precision While in machining a curve surface in order to not to perform backlash compensation in a fixed point of the tool path to form a swollen ridge it needs to set a larger precision to make the clearance compensation to be distributed in a certain width 0190 Backlash compensation amount of X axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 291 CGiSR I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0191 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0192 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0193 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0194 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0195 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0196 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0197 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0198 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0199 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm
261. ostion after automatic operation handle interruption Programmed depth of cut Depth of cut by handle interruption Operation steps 1 After the dwell of the program execution in Auto mode switch over the control to MPG mode 2 For the tool offset by handwheel move Z axis downward or X Y axis parallel modify the coordinate system 3 After the control is switched to Auto mode the workpiece coordinates remain unchanged till the coordinates restore to their actual values after the machine zero return operation As the program run in Auto MDI DNC mode is shifted to MPG mode by dwell the control will execute the MPG interruption The coordinate system for MPG interruption is shown in Fig 6 2 1 ACTUAL POSITION 000002 N00120 CRELATIVE C ABSOLUTE MACHING X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Z 0 0000 HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED CREM DIST X 0 0000 X 0 0000 X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 S00000 T0010 MDI REL LABS CALLI MONTY Fig 6 2 1 The MPG interruption coordinate system clearing steps press CTRL X till X flickers then press lt CANCEL gt key the coordinate system will be cleared The operations of Y Z are the same as above while the zero returning is being performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically 220 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 6 2 2 Relation of M
262. p direction and the spindle is rotated clockwise Boring is performed in the positive direction along Z axis until point Z is reached At point Z the spindle is 89 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual stopped at the fixed rotation position after it is oriented again And the tool is retracted to the initial level in the opposite direction of the tool tip and then is shifted in the direction of the tool tip And the spindle is rotated clockwise to proceed to the next block operation The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance and the retraction direction is set by system parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 Q must be a positive value if Q is specified with a negative value the sign is ignored The hole bottom offset of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which should be specified carefully as it is also used for the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G87 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G87 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the canned cycle the offset is added while positioning to point R level Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring Ina blo
263. pecified in G 92 S_ it is clamped at the maximum spindle speed When the power is switched on the maximum spindle speed is not yet set the S in G96 is regarded as zero till M3 or M4 appears in program 152 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Spindle speed min t m The spindle speed min almost ome coincides with the surface speed zw m min at approx 160 mm radius 2008 22M 1800 1600 a Surface speed w S is 600 m min wm AASS PRR e w no w xo 20 wm 32 5 w 40 i z0 lOO radius mm Fig 6 6 2 Relations of workpiece radius spindle speed and surface speed 5 Surface speed is specified in G96 mode G96 mode G97 mode Specify the surface speed in m min orfeevmin Store the surface speed in n min or feetimin The surface speed inmin or feet min is converted to spindle speed rpm The stored surface speed nvmin or feetimin is used If no surface speed is stored 0 is assumed 153 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Restriction 1 Because the response problem in the servo system may not be considered when the spindle speed changes while the constant surface speed is still effective during threading so it is recommended to cancel the constant surface speed by G97 before threading In a traverse block specified by GOO the constant surface speed control is not made by calculating the surface speed by a transient change of the tool pos
264. peeer ons servoa wasstswetow oa seroaam massaton ais sevo aam nasm os oo 0416 servo alarm ranis deteoting roent 047 seno aarm nans parameerorr oo CME TC oat seoda supereteedning oo 022 senoaarnispeedenor 0423 servo alarm cumulative vavelsupemeteodyning ode masi unmatchedteedbeckalam OO os rasva asr xasana O fossa vasre YC 310 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ois zasne O 0454 4th axis driver alarm 0519 hardware overtravel 5th 0751 Ist spindle alarm AL XX detected 1004 User ladder beyond the maximum permissible linage or step number 1005 Incorrect END1 END2 functional instruction use 1006 Illegal output in NET 1007 PLC communication fail due to hardware failure or sysem interruption 1008 functional instruction wrongly linked 311 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1009 retworknorsontalines otinked 1010 editing NET loss due to power off in ladder editing 1013 illegal character defined 1014 CTR address repeated 1015 functional instruction JMP LBL10 wrongly processed or beyond the capacity 1016 incomplete NET constitution 1021 PLC stopped automatically by system when executed overtime 1026 NET link linage beyond the supported range 1030 false vertical line in network 1031 Message data area is full Please reduce COD instruction data list capacity 1040 Incorrect functional instruction CALL
265. pid effective before reference point return after power on 0 Manual rapid ineffective before reference point return after power on LRP 1 The positioning GOO interpolation type is linear 0 The positioning GO00 interpolation type is nonlinear RFO 1 Rapid feed stop when override is FO 0 Rapid feed not stop when override is FO TDR 1 Dry run effective during tapping 0 Dry run ineffective during tapping RDR 1 Dryrun effective during cutting feeding 0 Dry run ineffective during cutting feeding FDR 1 Dry run effective during rapid positioning 0 Dry run ineffective during rapid positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01 3 HPC NPC NPC 1 Feed per revolution effective with no position encoder 0 Feed per revolution ineffective with no position encoder 258 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual HPC 1 Position encoder installed 0 Position encoder not installed Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 01 4 DLF HFC HFC 1 Clamp combined by straight line and arc for helical interpolation feedrate 0 Clamp by straight line and arc separately for helical interpolation feedrate DLF 1 Reference point return by manual feed after reference point is setup and memorized 0 Reference point return by rapid traverse after reference point is setup and memo
266. point is stored in the CNC system Only the axis coordinate value specified by G28 is stored each time for the other axes not specified by G28 the coordinate values specified by G28 before are used If the intermediate point defaulted by the system is not ensured by user when using G28 instruction it is better to specify all the axes Take a consideration by N5 block in the following example 1 55 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual R reference position Fig 4 3 1 1 1 The action of the G28 block can be analyzed as following refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point of the specified axis from the current position point A point B at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to the reference point from the intermediate point point B point R at a traverse speed 2 G28 is a non modal instruction which is only effective in current block 3 The combined reference point return of a single axis or multiple axes is available in this system And the intermediate point coordinate is saved by system during the workpiece coordinate system change Example 1 N1 G90 G54 X0 Y10 N2 G28 X40 Set the intermediate point of X axis for X40 in G54 workpiece coordinate system and return to reference point via point 40 10 i e reference point return of single X axis N3 G29 X30 Return to the point 30 10 via point 40 10 from reference point i e target point return of single X axis N
267. position of 4th axis ABSOT 5015 Block end position of 5th axis Workoi orkpiece ABSOT e Pe f coordinate 5016 Block end position of X axis system ABSKP 5017 Block end position of Y axis ABSKP 5018 Block iti i ock end position of Z axis Allowed ABSKP 5019 Block end position of 4th axis ABSKP 5020 Block end position of 5th axis ABSKP 136 CGGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5021 Tool length offset value of X axis 5022 Tool length offset value of Y axis 5023 Tool length offset value of Z axis Tool length offset value of 4th axis Tool length offset value of 5th axis Unallowed Servo position offset of X axis Servo position offset of Y axis Servo position offset of Z axis Servo position offset of 4th axis Servo position offset of 5th axis Note ABSIO the last block end point coordinate in workpiece coordinate system ABSMT the current machine coordinate system position in machine coordinate system ABSOT the current coordinate position in workpiece coordinate system ABSKP effective position of G31 block skip signal in workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece zero offset value and additional zero offset value Variable No 5201 External workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis Function 5205 External workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 5206 G54 workpiece ze
268. pping cycle when the hole bottom is reached the spindle rotates reversely Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of point R E Dwell time F Cutting feedrate Spindle CCW Dwell Dwell Point R Dwell Point R Point Z Spindle CW Spindle CW Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle CCW when the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle is rotated reversely for retraction This operation creates threads Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the retraction operation is finished Before specifying G74 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CCW rotation is not specified it will be adjusted for CCW rotation in R level automatically by the current spindle speed specified If G74 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1 hole 83 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual P is a
269. programming speed F X override in G00 mode the axes speeds are set by number parameter No 088 093 and they can be overriden by rapid override the dry run speed is set by number parameter No 086 Note 3 The programming speed for feed per revolution is displayed when the block involving feed per revolution is being executed Note 4 The total workpieces machined is set by number parameter P355 total workpieces to be machined is set by number parameter P356 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and mediating The steps of relative coordinate position clearing are as follows 1 Enter a mode that displays the relative coordinate Fig 3 1 2 2 Clearing operation Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers then press key the relative coordinate in X axis will be cleared Fig 3 1 5 3 Mediating operation Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers then press key and the relative coordinate in X axis will be mediated The relative coordinate of the axis divided by 2 4 Coordinate setting Press and hold X key till X in the display flickers input the setting data and press key the data will be entered into the coordinate system 180 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual ACT POS CRELATIVE 000002 N0120 000008 N00060 X 16 0000 Y 16 0000 Z 56 0000 PRG SPEED 0 GOO G17 G54 G21 G40 G49 ACT SPEED 0 OFFSET H0000 D0000 FEED OVRD 100 PR
270. quence number insertion 0 Not automatic sequence number insertion If INI is set for 0 in metric input the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INI is set for 1 in inch input the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number oola SJZ MIRz MIRy MIRx SPT SPT 1 Spindle control type I O point control 0 Spindle control type frequency conversion or others MIRx 1 Mirror setting of X axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of X axis mirror OFF MIRy 1 Mirror setting of Y axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of Y axis mirror OFF MIRz 1 Mirror setting of Z axis mirror ON 0 Mirror setting of Z axis mirror OFF SJZ 1 Reference point memorizing yes 0 Reference point memorizing no Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 00 2 10P Asi sB1 Asio sBo SBO 1 Stop bits of communication channel 0 2 254 Sk r HISE GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual CG 0 Stop bits of communication channel 0 1 ASIO 1 Data input code of channel 0 ASII 0 Data input code of channel 0 EIA or ISO SB1 1 Stop bits of communication channel 1 2 0 Stop bits of communication channel 1 1 ASI1 1 Data input code of channel 1 ASII 0 Data input code of channel 1 EIA or ISO IOP
271. r The coordinate system set by machine zero taken as origin is called machine coordinate system It is set up by manual machine zero return after power is on Once set it remains unchanged till the power off system reset or emergency stop This system uses right hand Cartesian coordinate system The motion along spindle is Z axis motion Viewed from spindle the motion of headstock approaching the workpiece is negative Z axis motion and departing for positive The other directions are determined by right hand Cartesian coordinate system 3 3 2 Reference point There is a special point on CNC machine tool for tool change and coordinate system setup which is called reference point It is a fixed point in machine coordinate system set by machine builder By reference point return the tool can easily move to this position Generally this point in CNC milling system coincides with the machine zero while the reference point of Machine Center is usually the tool change point CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Reference position Tool cA There are two methods to traverse the tool to reference point 1 Manual reference point return see Manual reference point return in Operation Manual 2 Auto reference point return 3 3 3 Workpiece coordinate system The coordinate system used for workpiece machining is called workpiece coordinate system or part coordinate system which is preset by CNC system
272. rd axis Double word 99999999 Double word axis 99999999 1 For bit and axis parameters the data are comprised by 8 bits with each bit having different meaning 2 Axis parameter can be set to each axis separately 3 The data value range in above table is the common effective range The specific parameter value range actually differs See the parameter explanation for details Example 1 Meaning of the bit and axis type parameters Data number BIT7 BIT6 BITS BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT4 BITO Data number 2 Meaning of parameters other than the bit and axis type 02 1 Data number Data Note 1 The blank bits in the parameter explanation and the parameter numbers that are displayed on screen but not in parameter list are reserved for further expansion They must be set for 0 Note 2 If 0 or 1 of the parameter is not specified with a meaning it is assumed that 1 for affirmative 0 for negative Note 3 If INI is set for 0 in metric input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is mm 253 1 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INI is set for 1 in inch input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min Bit parameter System parameter number ISO 1 ISO code 0 EIA code INI 1 Inch input 0 Metric input SEQ 1 Automatic se
273. re is shown as Fig 4 2 14 2 below the scaling ratio of X is 2 that of Y is 1 G90 G00 X0 0 Y100 0 G51 X0 0 Y0 0 20 0 12000 J1000 G02 X100 0 Y0 0 R100 0 F500 Above instructions are equivalent to the following instruction G90 G00 X0 0 Y100 0 20 0 G02 X200 0 Y0 0 R200 0 F500 Magnification of radius R depends on I or J whichever is larger Scaled shape 0 0 100 0 200 0 Fig 4 2 14 2 Scaling of circular interpolation 1 If the axes scaling ratio are different and the circular interpolation is programmed by I J K the interpolation figure is shown as Fig 4 2 14 3 in following example X scaling ratio is 2 Y scaling ratio is 1 45 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G90 G00 X0 0 Y0 0 G51 X0 0 Y0 0 12000 J1000 G02 X100 0 Y0 0 10 0 J 100 0 F500 Above instructions are equivalent to the following instructions G90 G00 X0 0 Y 100 0 G02 X200 0 Y0 0 10 0 J 100 0 F500 In this case the end point does not beet the radius a linear section is included Y 200 0 Scaled shape 100 0 0 0 100 0 200 0 X Fig 4 2 14 3 Scaling of circular interpolation 2 7 Scaling is ineffective for the tool radius compensation tool length compensation and tool offset which is shown in Fig 4 2 14 4 Programmed figure Scaled figure Cutter compensation values are not scaled Fig 4 2 14 4 Scaling of tool radius interpolation Example for mirror image program
274. rface speed control SYC 1 Use synch spindle 0 Not use synch spindle SALM 1 Spindle driver alarm ignored 0 Spindle driver alarm not ignored EALM 1 Emergency stop alarm ignored 0 Emergency stop alarm not ignored LALM 1 Limit alarm ignored 0 Limit alarm not ignored FALM 1 Feed axis driver alarm ignored 0 Feed axis driver alarm not ignored Standard setting 0000 0000 2 Number parameter Parameter number Definition Default value 00000 I O channel input and output device selection Setting range 0 3 0001 Baudrate of communication channel 0 38400 Setting range 0 115200 unit BPS 0002 Baudrate of communication channel 1 115200 Setting range 0 115200 unit BPS 275 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0003 Waiting time of screen protection minute Setting range 0 999 0004 System interpolation period 1 2 4 8ms Setting range 1 8 0005 Axes controlled by CNC Setting range 3 5 0006 Program axis name of rotary axis When the CNC controlled axes is set for 4 the program axes names of rotary axes are set for 0 1 2 the 4 axis name is displayed for A B C respectively When the CNC controlled axes is set for 5 the program axes names of rotary axes are set for 1 2 12 10 20 21 the 4 and 5 axis names are displayed for AB AC BC BA CA CB respectively 0007 Axis name setting in primary coordinate system 0008 Servo axis number of each
275. rilling cycle Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 3 oza sw 269 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual SIJ 1 Displacement in canned cycle specified by l J K 0 Displacement in canned cycle specified by Q OZA 1 To make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling cycle G73 G83 0 Not to make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling cycle G73 G83 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 4 FHD PcP Dov VGR G84 G84 1 Use M codes in rigid tapping 0 Not use M codes in rigid tapping VGR 1 Arbitrary gear ratio of the spindle and position encoder enabled in rigid tapping 0 Arbitrary gear ratio of the spindle and position encoder disabled in rigid tapping DOV 1 Override effective during rigid tapping retraction 0 Override ineffective during rigid tapping retraction PCP 1 Tochange rigid tapping for high speed peck drilling cycle 0 Not change rigid tapping for high speed peck drilling cycle FHD 1 Single block effective for feed dwell during rigid tapping 0 Single block ineffective for feed dwell during rigid tapping Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 5 ov3 ovu TOR Niz NIZ 1 To perform the rigid tapping finishing 0 Not perform the rigid tapping finishing TDR 1 To use the same ti
276. rized Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01 5 PacD Pus PILS PPCK ASL PLAC STL STL 1 To select prereading working type 0 To select non prereading working type PLAC 1 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation exponential 0 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation linear ASL 1 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting speed difference control 0 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting angular control PPCK 1 To perform in position check by forecasting 0 Not perform in position check by forecasting PILS 1 Forecasting interpolation type circular interpolation 0 Forecasting interpolation type linear interpolation PIIS 1 Overlapping interpolation effective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting 0 Overlapping interpolation ineffective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting PACD 1 Acceleration deceleration type before forecasting S 0 Acceleration deceleration type before forecasting linear Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 1 6 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL 259 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual FBOL FBLS FLLS ALS 1 Rapid traverse type post acceleration deceleration Rapid traverse type pre acceleration deceleration Pre acceleration deceleration type of r
277. rner point to the start and the end point The virtual corner point is the corner point that exists if chamfering is not performed As the following figure shows 53 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 G91 G01 X100 0 L10 0 2 X100 0 Y100 0 Inserted chamfering block Virtual comer intersection 3 The corner rounding after R is used to specify the radius for corner As the following figure shows 1 G91 G01 X100 0 R10 0 2 X100 0 Y100 0 Center of a circle with radius R Restriction 1 Chamfering and corner rounding can only be performed in the plane specified and these functions can t be performed for parallel axes 2 A block specifying chamfering or corner rounding must be followed by a block that specifies a linear interpolation If next block is not linear block alarm is issued 3 Achamfering or corner rounding block can be inserted only for move instructions which are performed in the same plane If plane is switched neither chamfering nor corner rounding can be specified in a block 4 Ifthe inserted chamfering or corner rounding block causes the tool to go beyond the original interpolation move range alarm is issued 5 In a block that comes after the coordinate system is changed or a reference point return is specified neither the chamfering nor corner rounding can be specified 6 Corner rounding can t be specified in a threading block 7 Optional angle chamferi
278. ro offset value of the 1st axis 5210 G54 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 5211 G55 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis 5215 G55 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 5216 G56 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis 5220 G56 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 5221 G57 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis 5225 G57 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 5226 G58 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis 137 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5230 G58 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis G59 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis G59 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of the 1st axis G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of the 5th axis 4 Local variable The correspondence of address and local variable Argument Local variable Argument i address No address Local variable No i Q 17 ue R 18 i S 19 4 T 20 9 U 21 j v 22 5 w 23 z i X 24 j Y 25 M 13 Z 26 Note 1 The assignment is done by an English letter followed by a numerical value Besides the letters G L
279. rrent mode is G90 or G91 the scaling are always expressed by absolute mode Except specified in program the scaling can also be specified in parameters The number parameters P331 335 correspond to the scaling ratios of X Y Z 4 and 5 respectively If no scaling is specified the number parameter P330 can be used for scaling setting If the parameter P or J K value specified are negative the mirror image is made for the corresponding axis 3 Scaling setting The effectiveness of the single axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47 8 the effectiveness of the axis scaling mirror image is set by bit parameter NO 47 6 and the ratio 44 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual unit of it is set by bit parameter NO 47 7 4 Scaling cancellation After the scaling is cancelled by G50 followed by a moving instruction if the coordinate rotation is cancelled by default the current tool position is regarded as the start point of this moving instruction 5 In scaling mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can t be specified If needed they should be specified after the scaling is cancelled 6 Even different scalings are specified for circular interpolation and axes the ellipse path cann t be made by tool If the scaling ratios of the axes are different and the circular interpolation are programmed by R the interpolation figu
280. rs if G code not listed in this table is used or G code without the selection function is specified Note 4 G codes from different groups can be specified in a block but 2 or more G codes from the same group can t be specified in a block otherwise alarm or tool abnormity occurs Note 5 In canned cycle if G code from 01 group is specified the canned cycle will be cancelled automatically and system turns into G80 state But G codes in 01 group are not affected by G codes in canned cycle Note 6 G codes are represented by group numbers repectively according to their types All G codes can be cleared by bit parameter No 35 0 7 and No 36 0 7 setting at system reset and emergency stop 23 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 Simple G code 4 2 1 Rapid positioning G00 Format G00 X_Y_Z_ Function G00 instruction moves the tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental instruction at a traverse speed by linear interpolation It is set by bit parameter NO 12 1 and uses the following two path Fig 4 2 1 1 1 Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation G01 The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed not more than the traverse speed of each axis 2 Nonlinear interpolation positioning The tool is positioned with the traverse speed of each axis respectively The tool path is usually not straight
281. s the start point of the moving instruction 4 2 14 Scaling in plane G51 G50 Format G51 X_Y_Z_P___ Absolute instruction for scaling center coordinate P axis scaling by a same ratio Scaling processing blocks G50 Scaling cancel or G51 X_Y_Z_ _J_K_ scaling by different ratios l J K by each axis Scaling processing block G50 Scaling cancel 43 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Function G51 is used for the programming figure scaling in a same or different ratio by a position specified as the center G51 is needed to be specified in a single block and cancelled by G50 Y Po Scaling center Fig 4 2 14 1 Scaling P1 P2P3P4 P1 P2 P3 P4 Explanation 1 Scaling center G51 can be specified with 3 positioning parameters X_Y_Z_ which are optional These positioning parameters are used to specify the scaling center of G51 If they are not specified the tool current position will be specified for the scaling center Whether the positioning mode is absolute or incremental the scaling center is specified by the absolute positioning mode Moreover in polar coordinate system G16 mode the parameters in G51 are expressed by Cartesian coordinate system Example G17 G91 G54 GO X10 Y10 G51 X40 Y40 P2 Though in incremental mode the scaling center means the absolute coordinate 40 40 in G54 coordinate system G1 Y90 By incremental mode as for parameter Y 2 Scaling whether the cu
282. s Due to the difference of the tool length value assumed usually the 1 tool and the actual tool length in machining saved in the offset memory the tool of different lengths can be used for machining only by changing the tool length offset value but not changing the program G43 G44 specify the different offset direction and H code specifies the offset number For the tool length compensation the effectiveness of the offset value by H code respecified or in next block is set by bit parameter No 39 6 1 Offset direction 100 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G43 Positive offset frequently used G44 Negative offset Either for absolute instruction or incremental instruction when G43 is specified the offset value stored in offset memory specified with the H code is added to the coordinate of the specified axis moving end point in the program When G44 is specified the offset value specified by H code is subtracted from the coordinate of the end position and the resulting value obtained is taken as the final coordinate of the end position G43 G44 are modal G code which are effective till another G code belonging to the same group is used 2 Specification of offset value The length offset number is specified by H code and the new moving instruction value of Z axis is obtained by plusing or subtracting the value of the offset number from the moving instruction value of Z axis The offset number can be spec
283. s 140 4 7 5 Examples for custom MAaCro c cccccececeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeesecceeeeeeeeeeseeneneaeeeeeeeess 144 5 Miscellaneous Function M code 111cccsssenccesssnenccsessnnecsesenneessseensnsssesnenssseenanessseesnensneaseneess 146 5 1 M codes controlled by PLC 0 ceceeccececcceceeeeeeecneeceeeeeeeseeeceaeaeeeeeeeeseeseaeaeeseeeeeeesseneas 147 5 1 1 Forward and reverse rotation instructions M03 M04 ssssseseessserererene 147 5 1 2 Spindle stop MOS rresiaren oaia ana eE eave AEAEE EEEE EE 148 5 1 3 Cooling on and off M08 M09 assssssssesssesssesseseseeeseerrseereereeerenereserssreeseeene 148 5 1 4 A axis release and clamping M10 M11 aassssssssssssssrsrseeernrerrrrssrrrrresererererre 148 5 1 5 Tool release and clamping M16 M17 ou cceeeececseececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeneaeeess 148 5 1 6 Spindle orientation M19 cceccceccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeees 148 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 woo ccecccccececseeeeeeeseeeueeseeueeeseeaeeeeeenaees 148 5 1 8 Magazine rotation instruction M23 M24 oo ccccccccccceceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeseenaeeeas 148 521 9 Rigid tapping CM29 ocean een eee a onset eth ee 148 5 1 10 Lubricating on and off M32 M33 o cccceccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeas 148 5 1 11 Helical chip remover on and off M35 M36 ou ccceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeees 148 5 1 12 Mirror image instructions M40 M41 M42 M43 oc ccceseeeeeeeeees 1
284. s the incremental value from the intermediate point in incremental programming If an axis is not specified it means the axis 57 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual has no moving relative to the intermediate point The G29 instruction followed by an axis is a single axis return with no action taken by other axes Example 1 G90 GO X10 Y10 G91 G28 X20 Y20 Reference point return via the intermediate point 30 30 G29 X30 Return to 60 30 from the reference point via the intermediate point 30 30 Note The component in X axis should be 60 in incremental programming The intermediate point of G29 instruction is assigned by G28 G30 Refer to G28 explanation for the definition criterion and system default of the intermediate point 4 3 4 Reference point return check G27 Format G27 X_Y_Z_ Function It is used for the reference point return check the reference point is specified by X_Y_Z_ absolute incremental instruction Explanation 1 G27 instruction positions the tool at a traverse speed If the tool reaches the reference point the reference point return indicator lights up However if the position reached by the tool is not the reference point an alarm is issued 2 In machine lock mode even G27 is specified and the tool has automatically returned to the reference point the indicator for return completion doesn t light up 3 In an offset mode the position to be reached by the tool with G2
285. side fine milling cycle G38 CW rectangle outside fine milling cycle l Rectangular width in X axis ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm Rectangular width in Y axis ranging within 0 mm 9999 999mm Distance of start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm J L U Corner radius no corner transition if omitted D Tool diameter number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool diameter value is given by the number specified K Repetitions Cycle process d Rapid to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To position to the start point from current position at the bottom 5 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 6 To make linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 7 To make circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 8 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G37 Start point Explanation For the rectangle outside fine milling the interpolation direction of the transition arc is not consistent with that of the fine milling arc and the interpolation direction in explanation means that B CGSB I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual of the fine milling arc Example To fine mill a circular groove that has been rough
286. spindle speed monitoring Setting range 0 9999 0261 Spindle encoder lines 1024 Setting range 0 100000 0262 Spindle override lower limit 0 0000 Setting range 0 99 9999 0266 Limit with vector ignored when moving along outside corner in tool radius compensation C Setting range 0 9999 9999 0267 Maximum value of tool wear compensation 400 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0270 Retraction amount of high speed peck drilling cycle 2 0000 G73 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0271 Reserved space amount of canned cycle G83 2 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0272 Spindle speed change ratio in tool retraction without overload torque signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0273 Spindle speed change ratio in tool retraction with overload torque signal received Setting range 0 9999 0000 296 CGGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0274 Cutting feedrate change ratio in tool retraction without overload torque signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0275 Cutting feedrate change ratio in small peck drilling cycle Setting range 0 9999 0000 0276 Macro variable number of retraction actions during output cutting Setting range 0 9999 0000 0277 Macro variable number output of retraction actions due to overload signal Setting range 0 9999 0000 0278 Traverse speed back to point R with address not specified Setting range 0 9999 0000 0279 Traverse speed to the hole bottom with addre
287. ss not specified Setting range 0 9999 0000 0280 Clearance of small peck drilling cycle Setting range 0 9999 0000 0281 Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom Setting range 0 1000 ms 0282 Maximum dwell time at the hole bottom 9999 Setting range 1000 9999 ms 0283 Override for retraction in rigid tapping 1 0000 Setting range 0 8000 1 2000 0284 Retraction or spacing amount in peck tapping cycle Setting range 0 100 mm 0285 Synch error range setting for rigid tapping Setting range 0 100 mm 297 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0286 Tooth number of spindle side gear 1st gear 1 Setting range 1 999 0287 Tooth number of spindle side gear 2nd gear Setting range 1 999 0288 Tooth number of spindle side gear 3rd gear Setting range 1 999 0290 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 1st gear 1 Setting range 1 999 0291 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 2nd 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0292 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 3rd 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0294 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 1st gear 500 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 2nd gear 1000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 3rd gear 2000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0298 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 40 spindle and tapping axis 1st gear Setting rang
288. stem by PLC See GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 3 MT In lt DIAGNOSE gt page press MT soft key to enter MT page as is shown in Fig 3 7 3 DIAGNOSE MT 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000 01000000 012 00000010 001 01000000 013 00000010 002 00010001 014 00000010 003 00000000 015 00000000 004 00000000 016 00000000 005 00000000 017 00000000 006 00000000 018 00000000 007 00000000 019 00000000 008 00000000 020 00000000 009 00000000 021 00000000 010 00000000 022 00000000 011 00000000 023 00000000 NO S0000 T0100 MDI IN C1 PLC NC K MT J PLC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 3 This is the signal sent to PLC by machine See GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number 4 PLC gt MT interface In lt DIAGNOSE gt page press PLC gt MT soft key to enter PLC gt MT interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 4 DIAGNOSE PLC MT 000002 N0120 NO DATA NO DATA 000 01000000 012 00000010 001 01000000 013 00000010 002 00010001 014 00000010 003 00000000 015 00000000 004 00000000 016 00000000 005 00000000 017 00000000 0o06 00000000 018 00000000 007 00000000 019 00000000 008 00000000 020 00000000 009 00000000 021 00000000 010 00000000 022 00000000 011 00000000 023 00000000 NO S0000 T0100 MDI UN C LPLC NC K MT PLC MT WAVE Fig 3 7 4 This is the signal sent to machine by PLC See GSK218M
289. t amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0034 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0035 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0036 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0037 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 278 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0038 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0039 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58_5TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0040 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 _X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0041 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0042 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0043 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59_4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0044 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0
290. tart position Start position G42 Programmed path gt Tool center path s Tool center path Linear Circular x Start position Linear Linear Start position r offset value r offset value Workpiece 0 Es Tool center path Tool center path amp Programmed path d Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 linear linear r offset value Tool center path 38 2 Tool movement in offset mode Alarm occurs and tool stops if the offset plane is changed during the offset The tool movement in offset mode is as following figures 112 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 ii Linear Circular i Linear Linear Workpiece Programmed path Workpiece Programmed path cf Intersection Tool center path Programmed path b a Tool center path 9 p 3 Special condition i No intersection Alarm occurs and the tool stops When the tool compensation value is large When the tool compensa tion value is small Center of the arc B Center of the arc A Programmed path For the figure above if the tool radius is small the offset paths of the arcs has an intersection lf the radius gets larger the intersection may not exist The tool stops at the end of the last black and alarm is issued 113 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming a
291. ted by their name sizes press key to view them and the programs will be listed by the date sequence with the latest modified program headed 10 2 5 Program lock The program switch is set in this system to protect the user programs to be modified by unauthorized personnel After the program editing set the program switch for OFF to lock the program And the program edit is disabled See Section 3 5 1 for its explanation 245 CGiSR I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 11 Communication This system can communicate with PC or USB via interface connection 11 1 Serial communication The serial communication software of this GSK218M system uses Windows interface which is used to send and receive files or execute DNC machining from PC terminal to CNC terminal This software can be run in Win98 WinMe WinXP or Win2K operation systems 11 1 1 Program start Run the CommGSK218M exe program directly The interface of it is as following CEZ Communicator E o xj File Edit Series Port Operation View Help C New Open Save dy Cut E2Copy raste print P About Port COM1 Baud 38400 GSN oe Communic js File pta JFeceive File ES Receive file from CHC 11 1 2 Function introduction 1 File menu The file menu involves the functions of File Creation Open Save Print and Print setting and the latest the file list etc Edit menu The edit menu involves the function such
292. th effective in feedforward control Cutting feed effective in feedforward control To perform backlash compensation for cutting feed and rapid traverse separately 0 To perform backlash compensation for cutting feed and rapid traverse together 260 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual RVCS 1 Backlash compensation type ascending or decending 0 Backlash compensation type fixed frequency Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 1 9 lov ALMS ALMS5 ALMS4 ALMSZ ALMSY ALMSX ALMX 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALMY 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALMZ 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALM4 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm ALM5 1 High level effective of driver alarm 0 Low level effective of driver alarm IOV 1 High level effective of override signal 0 Low level effective of override signal Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 0 pit mmx mL ITL 1 All axes interlock signal effective 0 All axes interlock signal ineffective ITX 1 Each axis interlock signal effective 0 Each axis interlock signal ineffective DIT 1 Each axis direction interlock signal effective 0 Each axis direction interlock signal
293. the OVERTRAVEL key on the panel then move the axis out reversely for positive overtravel move negatively for negative overtravel move positively 2 6 Storage stroke detection By storage stroke detection 1 and 2 the system can specify 3 areas that the tool can t enter 172 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 1 J K 1 Inside is forbidden area 2 Outside is forbidden area CA Tool forbidden area Fig 2 6 1 Stroke detection When the tool goes beyond the stroke alarm is issued and the machine decelerates and stops When the tool enters the forbidden area with alarm issued the tool may move in the reverse direction that the tool enters Explanation 1 Storage stroke detection 1 its boundary is set by number parameter P66 P75 the outside of this area is forbidden area which is usually set for the machine maximum travel by the machine builder 2 Storage stroke detection 2 its boundary is set by number parameter P76 P85 or program instructions the inside or outside of this area can be set for a forbidden area which is set by bit parameter No 11 0 a When the forbidden area is set by parameters the A and B points in the following figure must be set B I J K X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X I gt Min command incremental unit Y J gt Min command incremental unit Z K gt C Min command incremental unit mm F 7500 F rapid traverse speed mm min Fig 2
294. the end of the tool movement respectively The acceleration can be set by the number parameter P125 P128 In non forecast mode the maximum cutting feedrate is set by number parameter P94 and in forecast mode it is set by number parameter P96 If the feedrate is more than that use the feedrate set by that parameter In non forecast mode the minimum cutting feedrate is set by number parameter P95 and in forecast mode it is set by parameter P97 If the feedrate is less than that use the feedrate set by that parameter The cutting feedrate in auto mode at power on is set by number parameter P87 The cutting feedrate can be specified by the following two types 1 Feed per minute G94 it is used to specify the feed amount per minute after F code 2 Feed per revolution G95 it is used to specify the feed amount per revolution after 155 CGSB I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual F code 7 2 1 Feed per minute G94 Format G94 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount in a minute Unit mm min or inch min Explanation 1 After specifying G94 in feed per minute mode the feed amount of the tool per minute is directly specified by a number after F 2 G94 is a modal code Once specified it is effective till G95 is specified The default at power on is feed per minute mode 3 An override from 0 to 150 can be applied to feed per minute with the override key on the operator panel Feed amount per minute mm m
295. the instruction Note 3 Display and setting of variable It can be displayed on LCD or be set by MDI 2 Typies of variables Variables are classified into null variables local variables common variables and system variables with different applications and characteristics 1 Null variables 0 This variable always be null no value can be assigned to it 2 Local variables 1 50 They can only be used for data storage in a macro such as the results of operations When the power is turned off they are initialized for null When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables 133 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 3 Common variables 100 199 500 999 They can be shared among the main program and the custom macros called by the main program Namely the variable I in a custom macro program is identical with that in other macro program So the common variable I of operation result of a macro program can be used in other macro programs Common variables usage not specified in this system can be used freely by user Cleared at power off all reset for null K ee at power on Common variables p Data saved in files and reserved even 500 999 power off 4 System variables They are used for reading and writing a variety of CNC data which are shown as follows 1 Interface input signal 1000 1047 read signal input by PLC by bits 2 Interface output signal
296. then retracts rapidly The spindle is rotated by miscellaneous function M code before G81 is specified If G81 and M code are specified in a same block M code is executed while the 1 hole positioning operation is being performed then the system goes on next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the 1st hole If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset is either added or cancelled while positioning to point R level Example M3 S2000 Spindle running start G90 G99 G81 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 10 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drilling hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 in a same block otherwise alarm occurs 77 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring G82 Format G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_ Function It is used for normal drilling to feed to the hole bottom
297. ting page 1 Entry of page Pressing key to enter the SETTING page there are SETTING SWITCH 189 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G54 G59 PANEL SERVO DATA PSW sub modes in this page They can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys the pages are shown as following see Fig 3 5 1 SETTING 000002 N0120 MIRROR X 0 1 ON MIRROR Y 0 OFF 1 ON MIRROR Z 0 1 ON CODE 0 1 ISO IN UNIT CO MM 1 INCH 1 0 CHAN C 0 3 CHANNEL NO gt ABS PRG 0 ABS 1 INC AUTO SEQ CO OFF 1 ON SEQ STOP 0000 PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP 0000 SEQUENCE NO 2006 Y 11 M 14 D 14 H 26 M 45 S DATA S0000 T0100 MDI SETTING SWITCH G54 G59J PANEL SERVO gt Fig 3 5 1 2 SETTING explanation Press SETTING soft key to enter the page shown as Fig 3 5 1 After entering the page the user can view and modify the parameters The operation steps are as following Ca Enter lt MDI gt mode Cb Move the cursor to the items to be altered by pressing cursor keys c Key in 1 or 0 by following steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 X Y Z axis mirror image 1 Mirror image on 0 Mirror image off ISO code When the data in memory are input or output the code selected 1 ISO code 0 EIA code Note Use ISO code if GSK218M universal programmer is used Inch programming Set the input unit of the program for inch or mm 1 inch 0 mm I O c
298. tive the tool center moves as in B if a tool path is programmed as B and the offset value is set for negative the tool center moves as in A The figure with acute angles is often used with sharp angle arc interpolation figure If the offset value is set for negative the inner side of the workpiece can t be cut When cutting the inner sharp angle in a point interpolate an arc with a proper radius at the point for smooth cutting transition The compensation for left or right is judged by the compensation direction workpiece unmoved to the direction of the tool movement relative to the workpiece By G41or G42 the system enters compensation mode and by G40 the compensation mode is cancelled The example for compensation program is as following The block 1 in which the compensation cancel mode is changed for compensation mode by G41 instruction is called start At the block end the tool center is compensated by the tool radius that is vertical to the next block from P1 to P2 The offset value is specified by DO7 i e the offset number is set for 7 and G41 specifies the tool path compensation left During the offset the workpiece figure is programmed as P1 gt P2 P9 P10 P11 and the tool path compensation is performed automatically Program example for the tool path compensation G92 X0 YO Z0 1 N1 G90 G17 GO G41 D7 X250 Y550 The offset value must be preset by the offset number 2 N2 G1 Y900 F150 3
299. to be deleted Press keys to delete the block where the cursor locates Note N could be keyed in to delete the block whether the block is headed with sequence number cursor heading the line 10 1 1 7 Deletion of multiple blocks The blocks from the currently displayed word to the specified sequence number block can be deleted X100 0 MO3 02 N2233 SO2 N2300 M30 Current cursor location To be deleted Fig 10 1 1 7 239 CGS I HISZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Select lt EDIT gt mode press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the beginning of the target to be deleted position of word N100 as figure above then key in the last word of the multiple blocks to be deleted e g S02 as Fig 10 1 1 7 above press key to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified Note 1 The blocks that can be deleted are two hundred thousand lines at most Note 2 _ If several words to be deleted are same in program it will delete the blocks to the word nearest to the cursor location 10 1 2 Deletion of a single program The steps for deleting a program in memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Press B key to display the program there are two ways to delete program c Key in address key key in the program name e g For O00001 program key in the numerical key press key the corresponding program in memory will be deleted d Select
300. topped immediately All the outputs such as the spindle running coolant are also cut off If the emergency button is released varying by machine builders usually the button bumps up by rotating it left handedly the emergency is cancelled Note 1 Ensure the cause of the fault is eliminated before the emergency is cancelled Note 2 Perform the reference point return operation to ensure the position coordinate after the emergency is cancelled The common emergency is a normal close signal When the trigger point is broken off the system enters into emergency status and the machine stops immediately The wiring of the emergency signal circuit is as following 170 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 24V a Emergency stop switch ESP 2 3 3 Feed hold key can be pressed during the machine running to make the running to dwell But in rigid tapping cycle running the machine dwells till current instruction is executed 2 4 Cycle start and feed hold The Cycle Start and Feed Hold keys are used for the program start and dwell operations in Auto mode MDI mode and DNC modes The external start and dwell are set by bit parameter No 59 7 7 and they can also be set by modifying the address K5 1 of the PLC These two methods are equivalent 2 5 Overtravel protection Overtravel protection must be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the overtravel of the X Y or Z axis 2 5 1 Hardwar
301. torage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0067 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0068 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0069 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0070 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 281 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0071 Positive Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0072 Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0073 Positive 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0074 Negative 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0075 Positive 5TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0076 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0077 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 S
302. trol is switched to Step MPG JOG Machine Zero mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the system will execute deceleration and stop 230 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 9 Machine Zero Operation 9 1 Conception of machine zero The machine coordinate system is the inherent coordinate system by machine Its origin is called mechanical zero or machine zero as is called reference point in this manual It is usually fixed at the maximum stroke point of X axis Y axis or Z axis This origin that is a fixed point is set after the machine is designed manufactured and adjusted As the machine zero is not confirmed by the CNC system at power on the auto or manual machine zero return is usually performed The machine zero return has two types one revolution signal non one revolution signal It is set by bit parameter No 6 6 For the zero return of the non one revolution signal by the motor it is classified for the A B two types It is set by bit parameter No 6 7 Zero return type using stepper motor with no encoder A Machine zero return direction NPN NC _ Metal inductive approach block fixed on switch the slider T3 T2 T1 Explanation The approach As the system performs the machine zero return operation the machine slider moves in the positive direction And the T1 part on the inductive block touches the approach switch the system slows down Atte
303. truction Instruction path Ieee 2 Point R we ate ain ad gt Rapid feed on Cutting feed gt 4 G33 G34 fi Example To rough mill an inner rectangular groove as shown in the following by canned cycle G33 instruction 70 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Z Y J 50 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G33 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 170 J50 L10 W20 Q10 V10 U5 F800 To run the inner rectangular groove rough milling cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 Format G35 G98 G99 x Y Z R L J L_ U D_ F K G36 Function They are used for fine milling within a rectangle by the width and direction specified and the tool returns after fine milling Explanation For these instructions refer to canned cycle explanation in Table 13 1 7 G35 CCW inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G36 CW inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle l Rectangular width in X axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm Rectangular width in Y axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm Distance of start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging within 0 9999 999mm C r c Corner radius no corner transition if omitted Alarm is issued if U is omitted or equal to 0 and the tool radius is over 0 D Tool diameter number ranging within 0 128 DO is defaulted for
304. tside fine milling cycle G35 G36 0 00 ceeeceeeeeee cere eeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeteeeees 72 4 4 7 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 ceececcceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesecueeceeeeeseeesnenaeaees 74 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling Cycle G81 oo cece cceeecceceeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeeees 76 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring G82 0 cece cece ceeeceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeesseesneaaes 78 4 4 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 cccceccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeetecseeaeeeeeeeeteneaes 79 4 4 11 Right handed tapping cycle G84 o 0 ee eececccecccee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseceeeceeeceeeessnsneaees 81 4 4 12 Left handed tapping cycle G74 c cccccccccccceeee cece eeeeeeeecneeeeeeseeeesecseneaeeeeeeeeteneeas 83 AAAS Fine Boring cycle G76 sacscccssesdeescscnssthvanng oa r ae ae E a eat EAD N E 84 441A Boring Cycle G8 Fisse i a aT iE Eaa ar inane NEEE nea 86 AAAS Boring cycle GEG criin eeens kacian araea taira NEEE datadeanneebindanaadaaassiveees 87 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 ccceecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteneeeaeeeeeeeeteeneas 89 44 17 Boring eyele G88 sosioemosi rne aaa Oe 90 4418 BOrnG CYCle G89 ennnen oly det cane a EEEE a EAE Ean 92 4 4 19 Right handed rigid tapping G84 0 ec ee cece ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeseseeneeaeeeeeeeesseeeeeaees 93 4 4 20 Left handed rigid tapping G74 c ccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees
305. two or more axes all the axes offset can be cancelled by G49 while only the axis offset perpendicular to a specified plane can be cancelled by HO 5 G53 G28 or G30 in tool length offset mode While G53 G28 or G30 is specified in the tool length offset mode the offset vector of the tool length offset axis is cancelled after it moves to a specified position G53 cancelled at the specified position G28 G30 cancelled at the intermediate point but the modal code is not switched to G49 and the axes except the tool length offset axis are not cancelled If G53 and G49 are in the same block all the axis length offsets are cancelled after the axis moves to the specified position if G28 or G30 is in the same block with G49 all the axes cancel the length offset after they move to the intermediate point In tool length offset the offset vector cancelled by G53 G28 or G30 will be restored in the next block in the buffer 6 Example for tool length compensation A Tool length compensation in boring hole 1 2 3 B H01 offset value 4 102 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual offset i value Programmed 35 e 4mm_ Position N1 G91 GOO X120 Y80 1 N2 G43 2 32 H01 on 2 N3 G01 Z 21 F200 seese ee 3 N4 G04 P2000 ccscsisinisaessecencias NS GOO 221 S cevetsasenckeseciieeied iaia 5 ING X30 Y 50 sewed tected aceuinteceuahiles 6 N7 G01 Z 41 F200 sase eere 7 N8 GOO 241 o
306. type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0122 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0123 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 4TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0124 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 5TH axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0125 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 400 of cutting feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0126 S type time constant of pre acceleration 1 deceleration of cutting feed 2 Setting range 0 400 ms 0127 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0128 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 0 400 ms 286 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 0129 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0130 FL speed of exponential acceleration deceleration 0 Maximum blocks merged in pre interpolation Setting range 0 10 0131 In position precision of cutting feed 0 03 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0132 Control precision of circular interpolation 0 03 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0133 Contour control precision of pre interpolation 0 01 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0134 Acceleration of the fore linear acceleration 250 deceleration interpolated in forecasti
307. uch as the M code to disable the block pre reading function In addition the M code sent to machine by CNC without inner operation can be specified in a same block 5 2 2 Program dwell M00 In Auto running automatic operation pauses after a block containing MOO is executed And the previous modal information will be saved The automatic operation can be continued by pressing cycle start key which is equivalent to pressing down feed hold key 5 2 3 Program optional stop M01 Automatic operation is stopped optionally after a block containing M01 is executed If the optional stop on off is set for ON M01 is equivalent to MOO if the optional stop on off is set for OFF M01 is ineffective See OPERATION MANUAL for its operation 5 2 4 Subprogram calling M98 This code is used to call a subprogram in the main program See the PROGRAMMING Section 2 2 General structure of a program for details 149 CGS I HIS GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 1 In auto mode if M99 is used at the end of the main program the control returns to the program beginning to continue automatic operation after the block containing M99 is executed The blocks followed are not to be executed and the number of the workpieces machined is not accumulated If M99 is used at the end of a subprogram the control returns to the the main program block containing M98 after the block containing M99 is execut
308. uired the vector normal to block B is created at the start point 1 Linear linear Programmed path Tool center path 2 Linear circular Pa L w a Pai F a Tok center path Programmed path 3 Circular circular An arc whose end position is not on the arc Programmed path Cer z Tool center path Center Center Civ Normally there is almost no possibility of generating the situation that the length of the tool center path is larger than the circumference of a circle When G41 and G42 are changed the following situation may occur Circular circular linear circular Alarm occurs if the tool offset direction is changed and alarm that the tool offset can t be cancelled by arc instruction is issued when the tool number is DO Linear linear The tool offset direction can be changed 117 CGiSR I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Tool center path Programmed path P G42 N5 GO2G91X5000Y 7000 NG G41G02J 5000 N7 G42G01x5000Y7000 In this case the tool center path is not an arc of a circle but an arc from P1 to P2 and alarm may occur for interference check under some situation If the tool is needed to move by the whole circle it must be specified by segments G42 N5 G01 G91 X500 0 Y 700 0 N6 G41 G02 J 500 0 N7 G42 G01 X500 0 Y700 0 6 Temporary offset cancel In offset mode the offset is t
309. ultiplication 1 Jx K G65 H04 P I Q J R K Example G65 H04 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202x 203 5 Division 1 J K G65 H05 P I Q J R K Example G65 H05 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 203 6 Logic addition OR lI1 J OR K G65 H11 P I Q J R K Example G65 H11 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 OR 203 7 Logic multiplication AND 1 J AND K G65 H12 P I Q J R K Example G65 H12 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 AND 203 8 AND OR 1 J XOR K 141 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual G65 H13 P I Q J R K Example G65 H13 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 XOR 203 9 Square root 1 V J G65 H21 P I Q J Example G65 H21 P 201 Q 202 201 V 202 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 P I Q J Example G65 H22 P 201 Q 202 201 202 11 Rounding 1 J TRUNC J K x K TRUNC reserving or abnegating decimal portion G65 H23 P I Q J R K Example G65 H23 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 202 TRUNC 202 203 x 203 12 Algorism to binary 1 BIN J G65 H24 P l Q J Example G65 H24 P 201 Q 202 201 BIN 202 13 Binary to algorism 1 BCD J G65 H25 P l Q J Example G65 H25 P 201 Q 202 201 BCD 202 14 Compound multiplication and division 1 1x J K G65 H26 P I Q J R k Example G65 H26 P 201 Q 202 R 203 201 201x 202 203 15 Compound square root 1 V J K G65 H27 P I Q J R K Example G65 H27 P 201 Q 202 R 203
310. upport and service can be easily and promptly provided by our complete service mechanism and tens of service offices distributed in provinces around China and abroad The pursuit of excellent product and superexcellent service has made the GSK what it is now and we will spare no efforts to continue to consummate this South China NC industry base and enhance our national NC industry by our managerial concept of Century Enterprise Golden Brand Technological Spot Service You can ask for spot service if you have the problems that can t be solved by telephone We will send the authorized engineers to your place to resolve the technological problems for you CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Preface Your excellency It s our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK GSK218M CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is Programming and Operation manual A N Accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please carefully read this manual before usage This manual is reserved by final user All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without further notice We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSK s products MI CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual Warning and Precautions Warning note and expl
311. w about these parameters to avoid machine damage or hurt to personnel 3 5 6 Backup restore and transfer of the data In lt SETTING gt mode the 2 page press DATA soft key to enter data page The user data such as mode parameter number parameter tool parameter pitch data ladder and programs can be backup saved and reverted read and the data input or output to PC is also available in this system The part programs saved in CNC are unaffected during the data backup and reversion See Fig 3 5 6 194 CGS I HIZ GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual SETTING DATA 000002 PARAMETER M LADDER PMC _ PARA PMC C CUTTER COMP __ PITCH COMP MACRO VAR C MACRO PRG J SUB PRG Cd PART PRGR C JUUUUUUU JUUUUUUUU UUUUUUUU2 S0000 T0100 EDIT lt 4 DATA PSW Fig 3 5 7 Operation 1 Inthe 2 page of lt SETTING gt mode set the corresponding password in PSW soft key page The ladders parameters can be only operated under the machine builder s authority level System parameters tool offset pitch compensation and system macro variables can be operated under the system debugger level or above 2 Return to DATA page after the cursor moves to the target position the backup or reversion of the data can be finished by pressing key Note Data input and output system needs to connect with PC to transfer data by the relevant software
312. witching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 100 Spindle running start G90 G99 G85 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Restriction Cancellation Do not specify a G code in 01 group G00 G01 G02 G03 or G60 ina same block otherwise alarm occurs Tool offset In canned cycle the tool radius compensation is ignored 4 4 15 Boring cycle G86 Format G86 X_Y_Z RF K Function Itis used to perform a boring cycle Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinate of 87 CGiSR I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolut
313. y or STOP soft key to enter the DRAW STOP mode then the sign is headed to T STOP C Press SWITCH soft key once to switch over the graph in the corresponding 0 5 coordinate display page D Press key or ERASE soft key to erase the graph drawn 3 7 Diagnosis display The status of DI DO signals between CNC and the machine the signals transferred between CNC and PLC PLC internal data and CNC internal status etc are shown in the diagnosis display Refer to GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of the corresponding diagnosis number The diagnosis of this part is used to detect the CNC interface signals and the internal running signals and it can t be modified 198 CGSGR I HSU 3 7 1 Diagnosis data d Press GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual isplay T key to enter the Diagnose page which has 5 modes NC PLC gt NC MT PLC gt MT and WAVE They can also be viewed by pressing the soft keys See Fig 3 7 1 to Fig 3 7 5 1 NC interface Press NC soft key in lt DIAGNOSE gt page to enter this interface as is shown in Fig 3 7 1 DIAGNOSE NC DATA NO 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 NO 0 ooooocoooo ooooocqcqcooorr T T O O O O O T e O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ooooooooo a ooooocoooo oooooocooooo ooooonoooro 00000000 NO 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020
314. y pressing positive negative override keys In MDI mode the system will automatically select the corresponding gear as the specified speed is entered Spindle motor speed Max speed t103 E Max clamp speed of spindle motor Min clamp speed of spindle motor A Spindle rotation instructions Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 5 instruction Max speed Max speed Max speed Note When the spindle auto gear is effective the spindle gear is detected by gear in position signal and S instruction is executed 4 3 Other manual operations 4 3 1 Cooling control Compound key The cooling function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key The indicator lighting up is for ON gone out for OFF 214 CGS I HI GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 4 3 2 Lubricating control Y al Compound key The lubricating function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key 4 3 3 Chip removal Compound key The chip removal function is switched between ON and OFF by pressing this key The indicator lighting up is for ON gone out for OFF 215 CGS I Hi GSK218M CNC SYSTEM Programming and Operation Manual 5 Step Operation 5 1 Step feed Press key to enter the Step mode in this mode the machine moves by the system defined step each time 5 1 1 Selection of moving amount Press a key to select a moving increment in MEE jy keys the increment will be shown on the screen E g If press 0 key in lt

The user manual describes all items concerning the

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents